Browse Source

[help] Update of the internal help

Romain Rigaux 12 years ago
parent
commit
4b88f37
43 changed files with 5807 additions and 1913 deletions
  1. 76 26
      apps/about/static/help/index.html
  2. 661 294
      apps/beeswax/static/help/index.html
  3. 699 162
      apps/filebrowser/src/filebrowser/static/help/index.html
  4. 532 210
      apps/impala/static/help/index.html
  5. 209 108
      apps/jobbrowser/static/help/index.html
  6. 1124 288
      apps/jobsub/static/help/index.html
  7. 1311 374
      apps/oozie/static/help/index.html
  8. 139 3
      apps/pig/static/help/index.html
  9. 151 93
      apps/shell/src/shell/static/help/index.html
  10. 754 327
      apps/useradmin/static/help/index.html
  11. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/action.png
  12. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/applications.png
  13. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/browse.png
  14. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/convert.png
  15. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/copy.png
  16. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/databases.png
  17. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/edit.png
  18. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/eye.png
  19. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/fbtrash.png
  20. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/gear.png
  21. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/huearch.jpg
  22. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_beeswax_24.png
  23. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_filebrowser_24.png
  24. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_help_24.png
  25. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_impala_24.png
  26. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_jobbrowser_24.png
  27. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_jobsub_24.png
  28. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_oozie_24.png
  29. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_pig_24.png
  30. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_shell_24.png
  31. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_table_browser_24.png
  32. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_useradmin_24.png
  33. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/important.jpg
  34. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/info.jpg
  35. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/log.png
  36. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/misconfiguration.png
  37. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/note.jpg
  38. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/quick_start.png
  39. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/tip.jpg
  40. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/trash.png
  41. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/warning.jpg
  42. BIN
      desktop/core/static/art/help/workflow.jpg
  43. 151 28
      desktop/core/static/help/index.html

+ 76 - 26
apps/about/static/help/index.html

@@ -1,35 +1,85 @@
-<h1><a name="AboutHue-IntroducingAboutHue"></a>Introducing About Hue</h1>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE html
+  PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html lang="en-us" xml:lang="en-us">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"/>
+<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="commonltr.css"/>
+<title>About Hue</title>
+</head>
+<body id="topic_3"><a name="topic_3"><!-- --></a>
 
-<p>The <b>About Hue</b> application displays the version of Hue you are running and lets you view configuration and logs.</p>
 
-<h1><a name="AboutHue-StartingAboutHue"></a>Starting About Hue</h1>
 
-<p>To start the About Hue application, click <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/about/static/help/images/23888205.png" width="30" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span> in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue browser page.</p>
+  <h1 class="title topictitle1">About Hue</h1>
 
 
-<h1><a name="AboutHue-AboutHueActions"></a>About Hue Actions</h1>
+  <div class="body conbody">
 
-<p>Within the About Hue page you can:</p>
+    <p class="p"> The <strong class="ph b">About Hue</strong> application displays the
+      version of Hue you are running. If you are a superuser, it lets you perform Hue setup tasks,
+      and lets you view configuration and logs. </p>
 
-<ul>
-	<li>Click the <b>Configuration</b> tab to view the current Hue configuration.<br/>
-This page shows a list of the installed Hue applications.  Click the relevant tab under <b>Configuration Sections and Variables</b> to see the variables configured for a given application.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The location of the configuration file is shown at the top of the page (by default in <tt>/etc/hue</tt>).  Note that all Hue configuration settings are done in the <tt>hue.ini</tt> file.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Check for misconfiguration</b> tab to have Hue validate your Hue configuration.  It will note any potential misconfigurations and provide hints as to how to fix them.  You can edit the configuration file or use Cloudera Manager, if installed, to manage your changes.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Server Logs</b> tab to view the Hue Server logs.  You can also download the logs to your local system  as a zip file from this page.</li>
-</ul>
+    <div class="section" id="topic_3__section_nph_qgn_1k"><a name="topic_3__section_nph_qgn_1k"><!-- --></a><h2 class="title sectiontitle">Starting About Hue</h2>
+      
+      <p class="p"> To start the About Hue application, click <a name="topic_3__image_vms_qgn_1k"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_3__image_vms_qgn_1k" src="/static/art/help/quick_start.png"/> in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue browser page. It opens
+        to the Quick Start Wizard screen. </p>
 
+    </div>
 
-				    					    <br/>
-                        </td>
-		    </tr>
-	    </table>
-	    
-    </body>
-</html>
+    <div class="section" id="topic_3__section_ert_5zh_zj"><a name="topic_3__section_ert_5zh_zj"><!-- --></a><h2 class="title sectiontitle">Quick Start Wizard</h2>
+      
+      <p class="p">The Quick Start wizard allows you to perform the following Hue setup operations by clicking
+        the tab of each step or sequentially by clicking <span class="ph uicontrol">Next</span> in each
+        screen:</p>
+
+      <a name="topic_3__ol_h3f_xzh_zj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_3__ol_h3f_xzh_zj">
+        <li class="li" id="topic_3__li_h1j_fhk_zj"><a name="topic_3__li_h1j_fhk_zj"><!-- --></a><strong class="ph b">Check
+            Configuration</strong> validates your Hue configuration. It will note any potential
+          misconfiguration and provide hints as to how to fix them. You can edit the configuration
+          file described in the next section or use Cloudera Manager, if installed, to manage your
+          changes.</li>
+
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Examples</strong> contains links to install
+          examples into the Beeswax, Cloudera Impala, Metastore Manager, Job Designer, Oozie
+          Editor/Dashboard, and Pig Editor applications. </li>
+
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Users</strong> contains a link to the User
+          Admin application to create or import users and a checkbox to enable and disable
+          collection of usage information.</li>
+
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Go!</strong> - displays the Hue home
+          screen, which contains links to the different categories of applications supported by Hue:
+          Query, Hadoop, and Workflow. </li>
+
+      </ol>
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="section" id="topic_3__section_ott_vzh_zj"><a name="topic_3__section_ott_vzh_zj"><!-- --></a><h2 class="title sectiontitle">Configuration</h2>
+      
+      <p class="p">Displays a list of the installed Hue applications and their
+        configuration. The location of the folder containing the Hue configuration files is shown at
+        the top of the page. Hue configuration settings are in the <samp class="ph codeph">hue.ini</samp> configuration file. </p>
+
+      <p class="p">Click the tabs under <strong class="ph b">Configuration
+          Sections and Variables</strong> to see the settings configured for each application. For
+        information on configuring these settings, see Hue Configuration in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">CDH4
+          Installation</a>.</p>
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="section" id="topic_3__section_qfz_vzh_zj"><a name="topic_3__section_qfz_vzh_zj"><!-- --></a><h2 class="title sectiontitle">Server Logs</h2>
+      
+      <p class="p">Displays the Hue Server log and allows you to download the log to your
+        local system in a zip file.</p>
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+
+</body>
+</html>

+ 661 - 294
apps/beeswax/static/help/index.html

@@ -1,296 +1,663 @@
-<h1><a name="Beeswax-IntroducingBeeswax"></a>Introducing Beeswax</h1>
-
-<p>The Beeswax application enables you to perform queries on Apache Hive, a data warehousing system designed to work with Hadoop. For information about Hive, see <a href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/hive/">Hive Documentation</a>. You can create, run, and manage queries, and download the results in a Microsoft Office Excel worksheet file or a comma-separated values file.</p>
-
-
-<h2><a name="Beeswax-Contents"></a>Contents</h2>
-
-<style type='text/css'>/*<![CDATA[*/
-div.rbtoc1359395567394 {margin-left: 1.5em;padding: 0px;}
-div.rbtoc1359395567394 ul {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 20px;}
-div.rbtoc1359395567394 li {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 0px;}
-
-/*]]>*/</style><div class='rbtoc1359395567394'>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#Beeswax-IntroducingBeeswax'>Introducing Beeswax</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#Beeswax-BeeswaxandHiveInstallationandConfiguration'>Beeswax and Hive Installation and Configuration</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#Beeswax-StartingBeeswax'>Starting Beeswax</a></li>
-<ul>
-</ul>
-    <li><a href='#Beeswax-WorkingwithQueries'>Working with Queries</a></li>
-<ul>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#Beeswax-CreatingandRunningQueries'>Creating and Running Queries</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#Beeswax-AdvancedQuerySettings'>Advanced Query Settings</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#Beeswax-ViewingQueryHistory'>Viewing Query History</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#Beeswax-Viewing%2CEditing%2CorDeletingSavedQueries'>Viewing, Editing, or Deleting Saved Queries</a></li>
-</ul>
-</ul>
-</ul></div>
-<p><br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-
-<h1><a name="Beeswax-BeeswaxandHiveInstallationandConfiguration"></a>Beeswax and Hive Installation and Configuration</h1>
-
-<p>Beeswax is installed and configured as part of Hue. For information about installing and configuring Hue, see <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/CDH4DOC/Hue+Installation">Hue Installation</a>.</p>
-
-<p>Beeswax assumes an existing Hive installation.  The Hue installation instructions include the configuration necessary for Beeswax to access Hive. You can view the current Hive configuration from from the <b>Settings</b> tab in the Beeswax application.</p>
-
-<p>By default, a Beeswax user can see the saved queries for all users &#8211; both his/her own queries and those of other Beeswax users. To restrict viewing saved queries to the query owner and Hue administrators, set the <tt>share_saved_queries</tt> property under the <tt>[beeswax]</tt> section in the Hue configuration file to <tt>false</tt>. </p>
-
-
-<h1><a name="Beeswax-StartingBeeswax"></a>Starting Beeswax</h1>
-
-<p>To start the Beeswax application, click the <b>Beeswax</b> icon (<span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/beeswax/static/help/images/23888161.png" width="30" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue browser page.</p>
-
-<h1><a name="Beeswax-WorkingwithQueries"></a>Working with Queries</h1>
-
-<p>The Query Editor view lets you create queries in the <a href="http://wiki.apache.org/hadoop/Hive/LanguageManual">Hive Query Language (HQL)</a>, which is similar to Structured Query Language (SQL). You can name and save your queries to use later. When you submit a query, the Beeswax Server uses Hive to run the queries. You can either wait for the query to complete, or return later to find the queries in the History view. You can also request receive an email message after the query is completed.</p>
-
-<h3><a name="Beeswax-CreatingandRunningQueries"></a>Creating and Running Queries</h3>
-
-<div class='panelMacro'><table class='noteMacro'><colgroup><col width='24'><col></colgroup><tr><td valign='top'><img src="/static/art/help/warning.gif" width="16" height="16" align="absmiddle" alt="" border="0"></td><td><b>Note</b><br />To run a query, you must be logged in to Hue as a user that also has a Unix user account on the remote server.</td></tr></table></div>
-
-<p><b>To create and run a query</b>:</p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>In the Query Editor window, type the query. For example, to select all data from the <em>sample_08</em> table, you would type:
-<div class="code panel" style="border-width: 1px;"><div class="codeContent panelContent">
-<div id="root">
-		<pre class="theme: Default; brush: plain; gutter: false">SELECT * FROM sample_08</pre>
-		</div>
-</div></div></li>
-	<li>In the box to the left of the Query field, you can override the default Hive and Hadoop settings, specify file resources and user-defined functions, and enable users to enter parameters at run-time, and request email notification when the job is complete.  See <a href="#Beeswax-AdvancedSettings">Advanced Query Settings</a> for details on using these settings.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To save your query and advanced settings to use again later, click <b>Save As,</b> enter a name and description, and then click <b>OK</b>. To save changes to an existing query, click <b>Save.</b>
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>If you want to view the execution plan for the query, click <b>Explain</b>. For more information, see <a href="http://wiki.apache.org/hadoop/Hive/LanguageManual/Explain">http://wiki.apache.org/hadoop/Hive/LanguageManual/Explain</a>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To run the query, click <b>Execute</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<a name="Beeswax-QueryResults"></a><br/>
-The Query Results window displays with the results of the query.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Do any of the following to download or save the query results:
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-	<ul>
-		<li>Click <b>Download as CSV</b> to download the results in a comma-separated values file suitable for use in other applications.</li>
-		<li>Click <b>Download as XLS</b> to download the results in a Microsoft Office Excel worksheet file.</li>
-		<li>Click <b>Save</b> to save the results in a table or HDFS file.
-		<ul>
-			<li>To save the results in a new table, select <b>In a new table</b>, enter a table name, and then click <b>Save</b>.</li>
-			<li>To save the results in an HDFS file, select <b>In an HDFS directory</b>, enter a path and then click <b>Save</b>. You can then download the file with FileBrowser.
-<div class='panelMacro'><table class='noteMacro'><colgroup><col width='24'><col></colgroup><tr><td valign='top'><img src="/static/art/help/warning.gif" width="16" height="16" align="absmiddle" alt="" border="0"></td><td><ul>
-	<li>You can only save results to a file when the results were generated by a MapReduce job.</li>
-	<li>This is the preferred way to save when the result is large (for example &gt; 1M rows).</li>
-</ul>
-</td></tr></table></div></li>
-		</ul>
-		</li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<ul>
-	<li>Under <b>MR Jobs</b>, you can view any MapReduce jobs that the query started.</li>
-	<li>To view a log of the query execution, click <b>Log</b> at the top of the results display. You can use the information in this tab to debug your query.</li>
-	<li>To view the query that generated these results, click <b>Query</b> at the top of the results display.</li>
-	<li>To view the columns of the query, click <b>Columns</b>.</li>
-	<li>To return to the query in the Query Editor, click <b>Unsaved Query</b>.</li>
-</ul>
-
-
-<p><a name="Beeswax-AdvancedSettings"></a></p>
-
-<h3><a name="Beeswax-AdvancedQuerySettings"></a>Advanced Query Settings</h3>
-
-<p>The pane to the left of the Query Editor lets you specify the following options:
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-
-<style type="text/css">
-td.confluenceTd {
-border: #dddddd solid 1px;
-height: 36px;
-padding: 5px 10px;
-vertical-align: top;
-}
-th.confluenceTh {
-border: #dddddd solid 1px;
-height: 40px;
-padding: 5px 10px;
-vertical-align: center;
-}
-</style>
-
-
-<div class='table-wrap'>
-<table class='confluenceTable'><tbody>
-<tr>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> Option </th>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> Description </th>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>DATABASE</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> The database containing the table definitions. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>SETTINGS</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Override the Hive and Hadoop default settings. Click <b>Add</b> to configure a new setting. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-»&nbsp;&nbsp; For <b>Key</b>, enter a Hive or Hadoop configuration variable name. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-»&nbsp;&nbsp; For <b>Value</b>, enter the value you want to use for the variable. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />  <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-For example, to override the directory where structured <font color="#000000">Hive&nbsp;</font>query logs are created, you would enter <tt>hive.querylog.location</tt> for <b>Key</b>, and a path for <b>Value.</b> <br class="atl-forced-newline" />  <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-To view the default settings, click the <b>Settings</b> tab at the top of the page. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />  <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-For information about Hive configuration variables, see: <a href="http://wiki.apache.org/hadoop/Hive/AdminManual/Configuration">http://wiki.apache.org/hadoop/Hive/AdminManual/Configuration</a>. For information about Hadoop configuration variables, see: <a href="http://hadoop.apache.org/docs/current/hadoop-mapreduce-client/hadoop-mapreduce-client-core/mapred-default.xml">http://hadoop.apache.org/docs/current/hadoop-mapreduce-client/hadoop-mapreduce-client-core/mapred-default.xml</a> </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>FILE RESOURCES</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Make locally accessible files available at query execution time on the entire Hadoop cluster. Hive uses Hadoop's Distributed Cache to distribute the added files to all machines in the cluster at query execution time. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />  <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-Click <b>Add</b> to configure a new setting. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />  <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-From the <b>Type</b> drop-down menu, choose one of the following: <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<b>jar</b> &#8212; Adds the resources to the Java classpath. This is required in order to reference objects such as user defined functions. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<b>archive</b> &#8212; Automatically unarchives resources when distributing them. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<b>file</b> &#8212; Adds resources to the distributed cache. Typically, this might be a transform script (or similar) to be executed. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-For <b>Path</b>, enter the path to the file or click <b>Choose a File</b> to browse and select the file.&nbsp; 
-<div class='panelMacro'><table class='noteMacro'><colgroup><col width='24'><col></colgroup><tr><td valign='top'><img src="/static/art/help/warning.gif" width="16" height="16" align="absmiddle" alt="" border="0"></td><td><br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-It is not necessary to specify files used in a transform script if the files are available in the same path on all machines in the Hadoop cluster.</td></tr></table></div>
-<p> </p></td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>USER-DEFINED FUNCTIONS</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Specify user-defined functions in a query. Specify the function name for <b>Name</b>, and specify the class name for <b>Class</b> <b>name</b>. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-Click <b>Add</b> to configure a new setting. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />  <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-You must specify a JAR file for the user-defined functions in <b>File Resources</b>. To include a user-defined function in a query, add a $ (dollar sign) before the function name in the query. For example, if <em>MyTable</em> is a user-defined function name in the query, you would type: <tt>SELECT * $MyTable</tt> </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>PARAMETERIZATION</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Indicate that a dialog box should display to enter parameter values when a query containing the string $&lt;parametername&gt; is executed. Enabled by default. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>EMAIL NOTIFICATION</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Indicate that an email message should be sent after a query completes. The email is sent to the email address specified in the logged-in user's profile. </td>
-</tr>
-</tbody></table>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE html
+  PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html lang="en-us" xml:lang="en-us">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"/>
+<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="commonltr.css"/>
+<title>Beeswax</title>
+</head>
+<body id="topic_4"><a name="topic_4"><!-- --></a>
+
+
+
+  <h1 class="title topictitle1">Beeswax </h1>
+
+
+  <div class="body conbody">
+    <p class="p">The Beeswax application enables you to perform queries on Apache Hive, a
+      data warehousing system designed to work with Hadoop. For information about Hive, see <a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/hive/" target="_blank">Hive Documentation</a>. You can create Hive databases, tables and
+      partitions, load data, create, run, and manage queries, and download the results in a
+      Microsoft Office Excel worksheet file or a comma-separated values file. </p>
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_4_1"><a name="topic_4_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Beeswax and Hive Installation and
+      Configuration </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">Beeswax is installed and configured as part of Hue. <span class="ph">For information about installing and configuring Hue,
+        see Hue Installation in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html</a>.</span>
+      </p>
+
+
+      <p class="p">Beeswax assumes an existing Hive installation. The Hue installation
+        instructions include the configuration necessary for Beeswax to access Hive. You can view
+        the current Hive configuration from the <strong class="ph b">Settings</strong> tab in
+        the Beeswax application. </p>
+
+
+      <p class="p">By default, a Beeswax user can see the saved queries for all users –
+        both his/her own queries and those of other Beeswax users. To restrict viewing saved queries
+        to the query owner and Hue administrators, set the <samp class="ph codeph">share_saved_queries</samp> property under the <samp class="ph codeph">[beeswax]</samp> section in the Hue configuration file to <samp class="ph codeph">false</samp>. </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_4_2"><a name="topic_4_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Starting Beeswax </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">Click the <strong class="ph b">Beeswax</strong> icon (<img class="image" src="/static/art/help/icon_beeswax_24.png"/>)
+        in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue browser page. </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" id="concept_xvg_nzh_dk"><a name="concept_xvg_nzh_dk"><!-- --></a>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Managing Databases, Tables, and Partitions</h2>
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <p class="p" id="concept_xvg_nzh_dk__p_ygl_m13_dk"><a name="concept_xvg_nzh_dk__p_ygl_m13_dk"><!-- --></a>You can create databases, tables, partitions, and load data by executing
+          <a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/hive/language_manual/data-manipulation-statements.html" target="_blank">Hive data manipulation
+          statements</a> in the Beeswax application.</p>
+
+      <p class="p" id="concept_xvg_nzh_dk__p_pdp_m13_dk"><a name="concept_xvg_nzh_dk__p_pdp_m13_dk"><!-- --></a>You can also use the <a class="xref" href="metastoremanager.html#xd_583c10bfdbd326ba-3ca24a24-13d80143249--7f9b">Metastore Manager</a> application to manage the
+        databases, tables, and partitions and load data.</p>
+
+    </div>
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_4_2_1"><a name="topic_4_2_1"><!-- --></a>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Installing Example Queries and
+      Tables</h2>
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <div class="note note" id="topic_4_2_1__note_sb1_dlk_2k"><a name="topic_4_2_1__note_sb1_dlk_2k"><!-- --></a><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> You must be a superuser to perform this task.</div>
+
+      <a name="topic_4_2_1__ol_kss_btp_wj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_4_2_1__ol_kss_btp_wj">
+        <li class="li" id="topic_4_2_1__li_src_z3t_yj"><a name="topic_4_2_1__li_src_z3t_yj"><!-- --></a>Click <a name="topic_4_2_1__image_vv5_hnv_wj"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_4_2_1__image_vv5_hnv_wj" src="/static/art/help/quick_start.png"/>. The Quick Start Wizard opens.</li>
+
+        <li class="li" id="topic_4_2_1__li_zgj_z3t_yj"><a name="topic_4_2_1__li_zgj_z3t_yj"><!-- --></a>Click <strong class="ph b">Step 2:
+            Examples</strong>.</li>
+
+        <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Beeswax (Hive UI)</strong>.</li>
+
+      </ol>
+
+    </div>
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_4_3"><a name="topic_4_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Query Editor</h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">The Query Editor view lets you create, save, and submit queries in the
+          <a class="xref" href="http://wiki.apache.org/hadoop/Hive/LanguageManual" target="_blank">Hive Query Language (HQL)</a>,
+        which is similar to Structured Query Language (SQL).  When you submit a query, the Beeswax
+        Server uses Hive to run the queries. You can either wait for the query to complete, or
+        return later to find the queries in the History view. You can also request to receive an
+        email message after the query is completed.</p>
+
+      <p class="p">In the box to the left of the Query field, you can select a database,
+        override the default Hive and Hadoop settings, specify file resources and user-defined
+        functions, enable users to enter parameters at run-time, and request email notification when
+        the job is complete. See <a class="xref" href="#topic_4_3_2">Advanced Query Settings</a> for details on using these settings. </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_4_3_1"><a name="topic_4_3_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Creating Queries </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+          <li class="li" id="topic_4_3_1__li_v2d_p5k_xj"><a name="topic_4_3_1__li_v2d_p5k_xj"><!-- --></a>In the Query Editor window, type a query or
+            multiple queries separated by a semicolon ";".  To be presented with a drop-down of
+            autocomplete options, type <span class="ph uicontrol">CTRL+spacebar</span> when entering a query.  </li>
+
+          <li class="li" id="topic_4_3_1__li_ilk_p5k_xj"><a name="topic_4_3_1__li_ilk_p5k_xj"><!-- --></a>To save your query and advanced settings to use
+            again later, click <strong class="ph b">Save As</strong>, enter a name and
+            description, and then click <strong class="ph b">OK</strong>. To save changes to an
+            existing query, click <strong class="ph b">Save.</strong>
+          </li>
+
+          <li class="li">If you want to view the execution plan for the query, click <strong class="ph b">Explain</strong>. For more information, see <a class="xref" href="http://wiki.apache.org/hadoop/Hive/LanguageManual/Explain" target="_blank">http://wiki.apache.org/hadoop/Hive/LanguageManual/Explain</a>.</li>
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_ch1_5gb_zj"><a name="concept_ch1_5gb_zj"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Loading Queries into the Query Editor</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <a name="concept_ch1_5gb_zj__ol_kkg_vgb_zj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_ch1_5gb_zj__ol_kkg_vgb_zj">
+          <li class="li">Do one of the following:<a name="concept_ch1_5gb_zj__ul_xlq_jqb_zj"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="concept_ch1_5gb_zj__ul_xlq_jqb_zj">
+              <li class="li">Click the <span class="ph uicontrol">My Queries</span>  tab.<a name="concept_ch1_5gb_zj__ol_qhz_lqb_zj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" type="a" id="concept_ch1_5gb_zj__ol_qhz_lqb_zj">
+                  <li class="li">Click the <span class="ph uicontrol">Recent Saved Queries</span> or <span class="ph uicontrol">Recent Run
+                      Queries</span> tab to display the respective queries. </li>
+
+                </ol>
+</li>
+
+              <li class="li">Click the <span class="ph uicontrol">Saved Queries</span> tab.</li>
+
+            </ul>
+</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click a query name. The query is loaded into the Query Editor.</li>
+
+        </ol>
+
+      </div>
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_xsr_yx1_zj"><a name="concept_xsr_yx1_zj"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Running Queries </h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <div class="note note" id="concept_xsr_yx1_zj__note_vbn_4xk_xj"><a name="concept_xsr_yx1_zj__note_vbn_4xk_xj"><!-- --></a><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> To run a query, you must be logged in to
+          Hue as a user that also has a Unix user account on the remote server. </div>
+
+        <a name="concept_xsr_yx1_zj__ol_rnw_yx1_zj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_xsr_yx1_zj__ol_rnw_yx1_zj">
+          <li class="li">To execute a portion of the query, highlight one or more query
+            statements.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Execute</strong>. The Query Results
+            window appears with the results of your query. <a name="concept_xsr_yx1_zj__ul_f4w_yx1_zj"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="concept_xsr_yx1_zj__ul_f4w_yx1_zj">
+              <li class="li">To view a log of the query execution, click <strong class="ph b">Log</strong> at the top of the results display. You can use
+                the information in this tab to debug your query.</li>
+
+              <li class="li">To view the query that generated these results, click <strong class="ph b">Query</strong> at the top of the results display.</li>
+
+              <li class="li">To view the columns of the query, click <strong class="ph b">Columns</strong>.</li>
+
+              <li class="li">To return to the query in the Query Editor, click <strong class="ph b">Unsaved Query</strong>.</li>
+
+            </ul>
+</li>
+
+          <li class="li">If there are multiple statements in the query, click <span class="ph uicontrol">Next</span> in
+            the Multi-statement query pane to execute the remaining statements.</li>
+
+        </ol>
+
+        <div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> Under <strong class="ph b">MR JOBS</strong>, you can view any MapReduce jobs that
+          the query generated.</div>
+
+      </div>
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_axp_mgb_zj"><a name="concept_axp_mgb_zj"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Downloading and Saving Query Results</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <div class="note important"><span class="importanttitle"><img src="/static/art/help/important.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Important</b>:</span> 
+          <a name="concept_axp_mgb_zj__ul_p4w_yx1_zj"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="concept_axp_mgb_zj__ul_p4w_yx1_zj">
+            <li class="li">You can only save results to a file when the results were
+              generated by a MapReduce job.</li>
+
+            <li class="li">This is the preferred way to save when the result is large (for
+              example &gt; 1M rows).</li>
+
+          </ul>
+
+        </div>
+
+        <a name="concept_axp_mgb_zj__ol_agb_4gb_zj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_axp_mgb_zj__ol_agb_4gb_zj">
+          <li class="li">Do any of the following to download or save the query results: <a name="concept_axp_mgb_zj__ul_i4w_yx1_zj"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="concept_axp_mgb_zj__ul_i4w_yx1_zj">
+              <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Download as CSV</strong> to
+                download the results in a comma-separated values file suitable for use in other
+                applications.</li>
+
+              <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Download as XLS</strong> to
+                download the results in a Microsoft Office Excel worksheet file.</li>
+
+              <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Save</strong> to save the
+                results in a table or HDFS file.<a name="concept_axp_mgb_zj__ul_m4w_yx1_zj"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="concept_axp_mgb_zj__ul_m4w_yx1_zj">
+                  <li class="li">To save the results in a new table, select <strong class="ph b">In a new table</strong>, enter a table name, and then
+                    click <strong class="ph b">Save</strong>.</li>
+
+                  <li class="li">To save the results in an HDFS file, select <strong class="ph b">In an HDFS directory</strong>, enter a path and then
+                    click <strong class="ph b">Save</strong>. You can then download the file
+                    with <a class="xref" href="filebrowser.html#topic_6">File Browser</a>.  </li>
+
+                </ul>
+</li>
+
+            </ul>
+</li>
+
+        </ol>
+
+      </div>
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_4_3_2"><a name="topic_4_3_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Advanced Query Settings </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p">The pane to the left of the Query Editor lets you specify the
+          following options: </p>
+
+
+        
+<div class="tablenoborder"><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+            
+            
+            <thead class="thead" align="left">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="16.666666666666664%" id="d5062e390">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Option</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </th>
+
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="83.33333333333334%" id="d5062e399">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Description</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </th>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </thead>
+
+            <tbody class="tbody">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="16.666666666666664%" headers="d5062e390 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">DATABASE</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="83.33333333333334%" headers="d5062e399 ">
+                  <p class="p">The database containing the table definitions. </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="16.666666666666664%" headers="d5062e390 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">SETTINGS</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="83.33333333333334%" headers="d5062e399 ">
+                  <div class="p">Override the Hive and Hadoop default settings.  To configure
+                    a new setting: <a name="topic_4_3_2__ol_k5v_hcc_zj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_4_3_2__ol_k5v_hcc_zj">
+                      <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add</strong>.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">For <strong class="ph b">Key</strong>, enter a Hive or Hadoop
+                        configuration variable name. </li>
+
+                      <li class="li">For <strong class="ph b">Value</strong>, enter the value you want to
+                        use for the variable. </li>
+
+                    </ol>
 </div>
 
-<p><br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-
-<h3><a name="Beeswax-ViewingQueryHistory"></a>Viewing Query History</h3>
-
-<p>Beeswax enables you to view the history of queries that you have previously run. Results for these queries are available for one week or until Hue is restarted.</p>
-
-
-<p><b>To view query history:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>In the Beeswax window, click <b>History</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-Beeswax displays a list of your saved and unsaved queries in the Query History window.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To display the queries for all users, click <b>Show everyone's queries</b>. To display your queries only, click <b>Show my queries</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To display the automatically generated actions that Beeswax performed on a user's behalf, click <b>Show auto actions</b>. To display user queries again, click <b>Show user queries</b>.</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<h3><a name="Beeswax-Viewing%2CEditing%2CorDeletingSavedQueries"></a>Viewing, Editing, or Deleting Saved Queries</h3>
-
-<p>You can view a list of saved queries of all users by clicking <b>Saved Queries</b> in the Beeswax window. You can copy any user's query, but you can only edit, delete, and view the history of your own queries.</p>
-
-
-<p><b>To edit a saved query:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>In the Beeswax window, click <b>Saved Queries</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The Queries window displays.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Options</b> button next to the query and choose <b>Edit</b> from the context menu.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The query displays in the Query Editor window.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Change the query and then click <b>Save.</b> You can also click <b>Save As</b>, enter a new name, and click <b>OK</b> to save a copy of the query.</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<p><b>To delete a saved query:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>In the Beeswax window, click <b>Saved Queries</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The Queries window displays.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Options</b> button next to the query and choose <b>Delete</b> from the context menu.</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Yes</b> to confirm the deletion.</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<p><b>To copy a saved query:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>In the Beeswax window, click <b>Saved Queries</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The Queries window displays.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Options</b> button next to the query and choose <b>Clone</b> from the context menu.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-Beeswax displays the query in the Query Editor window.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Change the query as necessary and then click <b>Save.</b> You can also click <b>Save As</b>, enter a new name, and click <b>Ok</b> to save a copy of the query.</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-
-<p><b>To copy a query in the Beeswax Query History window:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>In the Beeswax window, click <b>History</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The Query History window displays.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To display the queries for all users, click <b>Show everyone's queries</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The queries for all users display in the Query History window.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Clone</b> link next to the query you want to copy.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-A copy of the query displays in the Query Editor window.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Change the query, if necessary, and then click <b>Save As</b>, enter a new name, and click <b>OK</b> to save the query.</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-				    					    <br/>
-                        </td>
-		    </tr>
-	    </table>
-	    
-    </body>
-</html>
+                  <p class="p">For example, to override the directory where structured
+                    Hive query logs are created, you would enter <samp class="ph codeph">hive.querylog.location</samp> for <strong class="ph b">Key</strong>, and a path for <strong class="ph b">Value.</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                  <p class="p">To view the default settings, click the <strong class="ph b">Settings</strong> tab at the top of the page. For
+                    information about Hive configuration variables, see: <a class="xref" href="http://wiki.apache.org/hadoop/Hive/AdminManual/Configuration" target="_blank">http://wiki.apache.org/hadoop/Hive/AdminManual/Configuration</a>. For
+                    information about Hadoop configuration variables, see: <a class="xref" href="http://hadoop.apache.org/docs/current/hadoop-mapreduce-client/hadoop-mapreduce-client-core/mapred-default.xml" target="_blank">http://hadoop.apache.org/docs/current/hadoop-mapreduce-client/hadoop-mapreduce-client-core/mapred-default.xml</a>.</p>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="16.666666666666664%" headers="d5062e390 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">FILE RESOURCES</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="83.33333333333334%" headers="d5062e399 ">
+                  <div class="p">Make files locally accessible at query execution time
+                    available on the Hadoop cluster. Hive uses the Hadoop Distributed Cache to
+                    distribute the added files to all machines in the cluster at query execution
+                      time.<a name="topic_4_3_2__ol_flf_vfc_zj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_4_3_2__ol_flf_vfc_zj">
+                      <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add</strong> to
+                        configure a new setting.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">From the <strong class="ph b">Type</strong>
+                        drop-down menu, choose one of the following:<a name="topic_4_3_2__ul_bkb_wfc_zj"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="topic_4_3_2__ul_bkb_wfc_zj">
+                          <li class="li">
+                            <strong class="ph b">jar</strong> — Adds the specified resources to
+                            the Java classpath.</li>
+
+                          <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">archive</strong> —
+                            Unarchives the specified resources when distributing them. </li>
+
+                          <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">file</strong> — Adds the
+                            specified resources to the distributed cache. Typically, this might be a
+                            transform script (or similar) to be executed. </li>
+
+                        </ul>
+</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">For <strong class="ph b">Path</strong>, enter the
+                        path to the file or click <a name="topic_4_3_2__image_sdp_cgc_zj"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_4_3_2__image_sdp_cgc_zj" src="/static/art/help/browse.png"/> to browse and select the file.  </li>
+
+                    </ol>
+</div>
+
+
+                  <div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> It is not necessary to specify files used in a
+										transform script if the files are available in the same path
+										on all machines in the Hadoop cluster.</div>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="16.666666666666664%" headers="d5062e390 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">USER-DEFINED FUNCTIONS</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="83.33333333333334%" headers="d5062e399 ">
+                  <p class="p">Specify user-defined functions. Click <strong class="ph b">Add</strong> to configure a new setting. Specify the
+                    function name in the <strong class="ph b">Name</strong> field, and specify
+                    the class name for <strong class="ph b">Class</strong>
+                    <strong class="ph b">name</strong>. </p>
+
+                  <p class="p">You <em class="ph i">must</em> specify a JAR file for the user-defined
+                    functions in <strong class="ph b"><strong class="ph b">FILE
+                        RESOURCES</strong></strong>. </p>
+
+                  <p class="p">To include a user-defined function in a query, add a $
+                    (dollar sign) before the function name in the query. For example, if <var class="keyword varname">MyTable</var> is a user-defined
+                    function name in the query, you would type: <samp class="ph codeph">SELECT * $</samp><samp class="ph codeph"><var class="keyword varname">MyTable</var></samp>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="16.666666666666664%" headers="d5062e390 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">PARAMETERIZATION</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="83.33333333333334%" headers="d5062e399 ">
+                  <p class="p">Indicate that a dialog box should display to enter parameter
+                    values when a query containing the string $<var class="keyword varname">parametername</var> is
+                    executed. Enabled by default. </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="16.666666666666664%" headers="d5062e390 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">EMAIL NOTIFICATION</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="83.33333333333334%" headers="d5062e399 ">
+                  <p class="p">Indicate that an email message should be sent after a query
+                    completes. The email is sent to the email address specified in the logged-in
+                    user's profile. </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </tbody>
+
+          </table>
+</div>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_4_3_3"><a name="topic_4_3_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Viewing Query History </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p">You can view the history of queries that you have run previously.
+          Results for these queries are available for one week or until Hue is restarted. </p>
+
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">History</strong>. A list of your
+            saved and unsaved queries displays in the Query History window.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">To display the queries for all users, click <strong class="ph b">Show everyone's queries</strong>.
+						To display your queries only, click <strong class="ph b">Show my queries</strong>.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">To display the automatically generated actions performed on a
+            user's behalf, click <strong class="ph b">Show auto actions</strong>. To display
+            user queries again, click <strong class="ph b">Show user queries</strong>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_4_3_4"><a name="topic_4_3_4"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Viewing, Editing, Copying, and Deleting
+        Saved Queries </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p">You can view a list of saved queries of all users by clicking <strong class="ph b">My
+            Queries</strong> and then selecting either  <span class="ph uicontrol">Recent Saved Queries</span> or
+            <span class="ph uicontrol">Recent Run Queries</span> tab to display the respective queries or
+          clicking <strong class="ph b">Saved Queries</strong>. You can copy any query, but you
+          can edit, delete, and view the history of only your own queries. </p>
+
+        
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="topic_4_3_4__table_rxy_gdh_b3"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="topic_4_3_4__table_rxy_gdh_b3" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+            
+            
+            <thead class="thead" align="left">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" id="d5062e719">Saved Query</th>
+
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" id="d5062e722">Procedure</th>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </thead>
+
+            <tbody class="tbody">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d5062e719 ">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Edit</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d5062e722 ">
+                  <div class="p">
+                    <a name="topic_4_3_4__ol_hbl_xbh_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_4_3_4__ol_hbl_xbh_dk">
+                      <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Saved Queries</strong>.
+                        The Queries window displays.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the query and click <strong class="ph b">Edit</strong>. The query displays in the Query
+                        Editor window.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Change the query and then click <strong class="ph b">Save.</strong> You can also click <strong class="ph b">Save As</strong>, enter a new name, and click <strong class="ph b">OK</strong> to save a copy of the query.</li>
+
+                    </ol>
+
+                  </div>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d5062e719 ">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Copy</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d5062e722 ">
+                  <div class="p">
+                    <a name="topic_4_3_4__ol_dqp_xbh_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_4_3_4__ol_dqp_xbh_dk">
+                      <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Saved Queries</strong>.
+                        The Queries window displays.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the query and click <strong class="ph b">Copy</strong>. The query displays in the Query
+                        Editor window.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Change the query as necessary and then click <strong class="ph b">Save.</strong> You can also click <strong class="ph b">Save As</strong>, enter a new name, and click <strong class="ph b">OK</strong> to save a copy of the query.</li>
+
+                    </ol>
+
+                  </div>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d5062e719 ">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Copy in Query History</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d5062e722 ">
+                  <div class="p">
+                    <a name="topic_4_3_4__ol_ut5_xbh_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_4_3_4__ol_ut5_xbh_dk">
+                      <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">History</strong>. The
+                        Query History window displays.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">To display the queries for all users, click <strong class="ph b">Show everyone's queries</strong>. The queries for
+                        all users display in the History window.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Click the query you want to copy. A copy of the query
+                        displays in the Query Editor window.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Change the query, if necessary, and then click <strong class="ph b">Save As</strong>, enter a new name, and click <strong class="ph b">OK</strong> to save the query.</li>
+
+                    </ol>
+
+                  </div>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d5062e719 ">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Delete</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d5062e722 ">
+                  <a name="topic_4_3_4__ol_fgh_1vc_zj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_4_3_4__ol_fgh_1vc_zj">
+                    <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Saved Queries</strong>.
+                      The Queries window displays.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the query and click <strong class="ph b">Delete</strong>.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Yes</strong> to confirm
+                      the deletion.</li>
+
+                  </ol>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </tbody>
+
+          </table>
+</div>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+
+</body>
+</html>

+ 699 - 162
apps/filebrowser/src/filebrowser/static/help/index.html

@@ -1,240 +1,777 @@
-<h1><a name="FileBrowser-IntroducingFileBrowser"></a>Introducing File Browser</h1>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE html
+  PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html lang="en-us" xml:lang="en-us">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"/>
+<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="commonltr.css"/>
+<title>File Browser</title>
+</head>
+<body id="topic_6"><a name="topic_6"><!-- --></a>
 
-<p>The File Browser application lets you browse and manipulate files and directories in the Hadoop Distributed File System (HDFS) while using Hue. With File Browser, you can:</p>
 
-<ul>
-	<li>Create files and directories, upload and download files, upload zip archives, and rename, move, and delete files and directories. You can also change a file's or directory's owner, group, and permissions. See <a href="#FileBrowser-WorkingwithFilesandDirectories">Working with Files and Directories</a>.</li>
-	<li>Search for files, directories, owners, and groups. See <a href="#FileBrowser-SearchingforFilesandDirectories">Searching for Files and Directories</a>.</li>
-	<li>View and edit files as text or binary. See <a href="#FileBrowser-ViewingandEditingFiles">Viewing and Editing Files</a>.</li>
-</ul>
 
+  <h1 class="title topictitle1">File Browser </h1>
 
 
+  <div class="body conbody">
 
-<h3><a name="FileBrowser-Contents"></a>Contents</h3>
+    <p class="p">
+      The File Browser application lets you browse and manipulate files and directories in the Hadoop Distributed File
+      System (HDFS) while using Hue. With File Browser, you can:
+    </p>
 
-<style type='text/css'>/*<![CDATA[*/
-div.rbtoc1359395607798 {margin-left: 1.5em;padding: 0px;}
-div.rbtoc1359395607798 ul {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 20px;}
-div.rbtoc1359395607798 li {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 0px;}
 
-/*]]>*/</style><div class='rbtoc1359395607798'>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-IntroducingFileBrowser'>Introducing File Browser</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-FileBrowserInstallationandConfiguration'>File Browser Installation and Configuration</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-StartingFileBrowser'>  Starting File Browser</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-WorkingwithFilesandDirectories'>  Working with Files and Directories</a></li>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-CreatingDirectories'>Creating Directories</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-ChangingDirectories'>Changing Directories</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-CreatingFiles'>Creating Files</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-UploadingFiles'>Uploading Files</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-DownloadingFiles'>Downloading Files</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-UploadingZipArchives'>Uploading Zip Archives</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-Renaming%2CMoving%2CandDeletingFilesandDirectories'>Renaming, Moving, and Deleting Files and Directories</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-ChangingaFile%27sorDirectory%27sOwner%2CGroup%2CorPermissions'>Changing a File's or Directory's Owner, Group, or Permissions</a></li>
-</ul>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-SearchingforFilesandDirectories'>  Searching for Files and Directories</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#FileBrowser-ViewingandEditingFiles'>Viewing and Editing Files</a></li>
-</ul></div>
-<p><br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
+    <ul class="ul">
 
-<p><a name="FileBrowser-FileBrowserInstallationandConfiguration"></a></p>
+      <li class="li">Create files and directories, upload and download files, upload zip archives, and
+				rename, move, and delete files and directories. You can also change a file's or
+				directory's owner, group, and permissions. See <a class="xref" href="#topic_6_3">Working with
+					Files and Directories</a>.</li>
 
-<h1><a name="FileBrowser-FileBrowserInstallationandConfiguration"></a>File Browser Installation and Configuration</h1>
 
-<p>File Browser is one of the applications that can be installed as part of Hue. For information about installing and configuring Hue, see <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/CDH4DOC/Hue+Installation">Hue Installation</a>.</p>
+      <li class="li">Search for files, directories, owners, and groups. See <a class="xref" href="#topic_6_4">Searching for Files and Directories</a>.</li>
 
-<h1><a name="FileBrowser-StartingFileBrowser"></a><a name="FileBrowser-StartingFileBrowser"></a> Starting File Browser</h1>
 
-<p>To start the File Browser application, click the <b>File Browser</b> icon (<span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/filebrowser/static/help/images/23888157.png" height="30" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue browser page.</p>
+      <li class="li">View and edit files as text or binary. See <a class="xref" href="#topic_6_5">Viewing and Editing Files</a>.</li>
 
-<h1><a name="FileBrowser-WorkingwithFilesandDirectories"></a><a name="FileBrowser-WorkingwithFilesandDirectories"></a> Working with Files and Directories</h1>
 
-<p>You can use File Browser to view the input and output files of your MapReduce jobs. Typically, you can save your output files in <tt>/tmp</tt> or in your home directory if your system administrator set one up for you. You must have the proper permissions to manipulate other user's files.</p>
+    </ul>
 
-<h3><a name="FileBrowser-CreatingDirectories"></a>Creating Directories</h3>
 
-<p><b>To create a directory:</b></p>
+  </div>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the File Browser window, select <b>New &gt; Directory</b>.</li>
-	<li>In the <b>Create Directory</b> dialog box, enter a directory name and then click <b>Submit</b>.</li>
-</ol>
 
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_1"><a name="topic_6_1"><!-- --></a>
 
-<h3><a name="FileBrowser-ChangingDirectories"></a>Changing Directories</h3>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">File Browser Installation and Configuration
+    </h2>
 
-<p>To change to a different directory, do one of the following:</p>
 
-<ul>
-	<li>Click the directory name or parent directory dots in the <b>File Browser</b> window.</li>
-	<li>Click the (<span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/filebrowser/static/help/images/23888454.png" height="30" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span>) icon, type a directory name, and press <b>Enter</b>.</li>
-</ul>
+    <div class="body conbody">
 
+      <p class="p"> File Browser is one of the applications installed as part of Hue. <span class="ph">For information about installing and configuring Hue,
+        see Hue Installation in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html</a>.</span>
+      </p>
 
-<p>To change to your home directory, click <b>Home</b> in the path field at the top of the <b>File Browser</b> window.</p>
 
-<div class='panelMacro'><table class='noteMacro'><colgroup><col width='24'><col></colgroup><tr><td valign='top'><img src="/static/art/help/warning.gif" width="16" height="16" align="absmiddle" alt="" border="0"></td><td><b>Note</b><br />The <b>Home</b> button is disabled if you do not have a home directory. Ask a Hue administrator to create a home directory for you.</td></tr></table></div>
+    </div>
 
-<h3><a name="FileBrowser-CreatingFiles"></a>Creating Files</h3>
 
-<p><b>To create a file</b>:</p>
+  </div>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the File Browser window, select <b>New &gt; File</b>.</li>
-	<li>In the <b>Create File</b> dialog box, enter a file name and then click <b>Submit</b>.</li>
-</ol>
 
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_2"><a name="topic_6_2"><!-- --></a>
 
-<h3><a name="FileBrowser-UploadingFiles"></a>Uploading Files</h3>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Starting File Browser
+    </h2>
 
-<p>You can upload text and binary files to the HDFS.</p>
 
-<p><b>To upload files:</b></p>
+    <div class="body conbody">
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>File Browser</b> window, browse to the directory where you want to upload the file.</li>
-	<li>Select <b>Upload &gt; Files</b>.</li>
-	<li>In the box that opens, click <b>Upload a File</b> to browse to and select the file(s) you want to upload, and then click <b>Open</b>.</li>
-</ol>
+      <p class="p">Click the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong> icon (<img class="image" src="/static/art/help/icon_filebrowser_24.png"/>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue browser page. </p>
 
 
-<h3><a name="FileBrowser-DownloadingFiles"></a>Downloading Files</h3>
+    </div>
 
-<p>You can download text and binary files to the HDFS.</p>
 
-<p><b>To download files:</b></p>
+  </div>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>File Browser</b> window, check the checkbox next to the file you want to download.</li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Download</b> button.</li>
-</ol>
 
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_3"><a name="topic_6_3"><!-- --></a>
 
-<h3><a name="FileBrowser-UploadingZipArchives"></a>Uploading Zip Archives</h3>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Files and Directories </h2>
 
-<p>You can upload zip archives to the HDFS. The archive is uploaded and extracted to a directory named &lt;archivename&gt;.</p>
 
-<p><b>To upload a zip archives:</b></p>
+    <div class="body conbody">
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>File Browser</b> window, browse to the directory where you want to upload the archive.</li>
-	<li>Select <b>Upload &gt; Zip file</b>.</li>
-	<li>In the box that opens, click <b>Upload a zip file</b> to browse to and select the archive you want to upload, and then click <b>Open</b>.</li>
-</ol>
+      <p class="p">You can use File Browser to view the input and output files of your
+        MapReduce jobs. Typically, you can save your output files in <samp class="ph codeph">/</samp><samp class="ph codeph">tmp</samp> or in your home directory if your system administrator set one up for you.
+        You must have the proper permissions to manipulate other user's files. </p>
 
 
-<h3><a name="FileBrowser-Renaming%2CMoving%2CandDeletingFilesandDirectories"></a>Renaming, Moving, and Deleting Files and Directories</h3>
+    </div>
 
-<p><b>To rename a file or directory:</b></p>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>File Browser</b> window, check the checkbox next to the file or directory you want to rename.</li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Rename</b> button.</li>
-	<li>Enter the new name and then click <b>Submit</b>.</li>
-</ol>
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_3_1"><a name="topic_6_3_1"><!-- --></a>
 
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Creating Directories
+      </h3>
 
-<p><b>To move a file or directory:</b></p>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>File Browser</b> window, check the checkbox next to the file or directory you want to move.</li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Move</b> button.</li>
-	<li>In the <b>Move</b> dialog box, browse to or type the new directory, and then click <b>Submit</b>.</li>
-</ol>
+      <div class="body conbody">
 
+        <ol class="ol">
 
-<p><b>To delete a file or directory:</b></p>
+          <li class="li">In the File Browser window, select <strong class="ph b">New &gt; Directory</strong>.</li>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>File Browser</b> window, check the checkbox next to the file or directory you want to delete. If you select a directory, all of the files and subdirectories contained within that directory are also deleted.</li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Delete</b> button.</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Yes</b> to confirm the deletion.</li>
-</ol>
 
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Create Directory</strong> dialog box, enter a directory name and then
+						click <strong class="ph b">Submit</strong>.</li>
 
-<h3><a name="FileBrowser-ChangingaFile%27sorDirectory%27sOwner%2CGroup%2CorPermissions"></a>Changing a File's or Directory's Owner, Group, or Permissions</h3>
 
-<div class='panelMacro'><table class='noteMacro'><colgroup><col width='24'><col></colgroup><tr><td valign='top'><img src="/static/art/help/warning.gif" width="16" height="16" align="absmiddle" alt="" border="0"></td><td><b>Note</b><br />Only the Hadoop superuser can change a file's or directory's owner, group, or permissions. The user who starts Hadoop is the Hadoop superuser. The Hadoop superuser account is not necessarily the same as a Hue superuser account. If you create a Hue user (in User Admin) with the same user name and password as the Hadoop superuser, then that Hue user can change a file's or directory's owner, group, or permissions.</td></tr></table></div>
+        </ol>
 
-<p><b>To change a file's or directory's owner or group:</b></p>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>File Browser</b> window, check the checkbox next to the select the file or directory whose owner or group you want to change.</li>
-	<li>Choose <b>Change Owner/Group</b> from the Options menu.</li>
-	<li>In the <b>Change Owner/Group</b> dialog box:
-	<ul>
-		<li>Choose the new user from the <b>User</b> drop-down menu.</li>
-		<li>Choose the new group from the <b>Group</b> drop-down menu.</li>
-		<li>Check the <b>Recursive</b> checkbox to propagate the change.</li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Submit</b> to make the changes.</li>
-</ol>
+      </div>
 
 
-<p><b>To change a file's or directory's permissions:</b></p>
+    </div>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>File Browser</b> window, check the checkbox next to the file or directory whose permissions you want to change.</li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Change Permissions</b> button.</li>
-	<li>In the <b>Change Permissions</b> dialog box, select the permissions you want to assign and then click <b>Submit</b>.</li>
-</ol>
 
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_3_2"><a name="topic_6_3_2"><!-- --></a>
 
-<h1><a name="FileBrowser-SearchingforFilesandDirectories"></a><a name="FileBrowser-SearchingforFilesandDirectories"></a> Searching for Files and Directories</h1>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Changing Directories
+      </h3>
 
-<p>You can search for files or directories by name using the query search box.</p>
 
-<p><b>To search for files and directories by name:</b></p>
+      <div class="body conbody">
 
-<ol>
-	<li>Enter the name of the file or directory in the query search box.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-File Browser lists the files or directories matching the search criteria.</li>
-</ol>
+        <ul class="ul">
 
+          <li class="li">Click the directory name or parent directory dots in the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong>
+						window.</li>
 
-<p><a name="FileBrowser-ViewingandEditingFiles"></a></p>
 
-<h1><a name="FileBrowser-ViewingandEditingFiles"></a>Viewing and Editing Files</h1>
+          <li class="li">Click the <img class="image" src="/static/art/help/edit.png"/> icon, type a directory name, and press <strong class="ph b">Enter</strong>.</li>
 
-<p>You can view and edit files as text or binary.</p>
 
-<p><b>To view files:</b></p>
+        </ul>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>File Browser</b> window, click the file you want to view.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-File Browser displays the first 4,096 bytes of the file in the <b>File Viewer</b> window.
-	<ul>
-		<li>If the file is larger than 4,096 bytes, use the Block navigation buttons (First Block, Previous Block, Next Block, Last Block) to scroll through the file block by block.  The <b>Viewing Bytes</b> fields show the range of bytes you are currently viewing.</li>
-		<li>To switch the view from text to binary, click <b>View as Binary</b> to view a hexdump.</li>
-		<li>To switch the view from binary to text, click <b>View as Text</b>.</li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-</ol>
 
+        <p class="p">
+          To change to your home directory, click <strong class="ph b">Home</strong> in the path field at the top of the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong>
+          window.
+        </p>
 
-<p><b>To edit files:</b></p>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>If you are viewing a text file, click <b>Edit File</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-File Browser displays the contents of the file in the <b>File Editor</b> window.</li>
-	<li>Edit the file and then click <b>Save</b> or <b>Save As</b> to save the file.</li>
-</ol>
+        <div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> 
+          <p class="p">
+            The <strong class="ph b">Home</strong> button is disabled if you do not have a home directory. Ask a Hue administrator to create a
+            home directory for you.
+          </p>
 
+        </div>
 
-<p>To view the file's location in the HDFS, click <b>View File Location</b>. 
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-File Browser displays the file's location in the <b>File Browser</b> window.</p>
 
-				    					    <br/>
-                        </td>
-		    </tr>
-	    </table>
-	    
-    </body>
-</html>
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_3_3"><a name="topic_6_3_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Creating Files
+      </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">In the File Browser window, select <strong class="ph b">New &gt; File</strong>.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Create File</strong> dialog box, enter a file name and then click
+							<strong class="ph b">Submit</strong>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_3_4"><a name="topic_6_3_4"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Uploading Files
+      </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p">
+          You can upload text and binary files to the HDFS.
+        </p>
+
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong> window, browse to the directory where you want to
+						upload the file.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Select <strong class="ph b">Upload &gt; Files</strong>.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">In the box that opens, click <strong class="ph b">Upload a File</strong> to browse to and select
+						the file(s) you want to upload, and then click <strong class="ph b">Open</strong>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_gft_ln5_yj"><a name="concept_gft_ln5_yj"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Copying a File</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <a name="concept_gft_ln5_yj__ol_ifz_pn5_yj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_gft_ln5_yj__ol_ifz_pn5_yj">
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong> window,
+            check the checkbox next to the file you want to copy.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click the <a name="concept_gft_ln5_yj__image_nz4_tn5_yj"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="concept_gft_ln5_yj__image_nz4_tn5_yj" src="/static/art/help/copy.png"/> Copy button.</li>
+
+        </ol>
+
+      </div>
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_3_5"><a name="topic_6_3_5"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Downloading Files
+      </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p">
+          You can download text and binary files to the HDFS.
+        </p>
+
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong> window, check the checkbox next to the file you
+						want to download.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Download</strong> button.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_3_6"><a name="topic_6_3_6"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Uploading Zip Archives
+      </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p"> You can upload zip archives to the HDFS. The archive is uploaded and
+          extracted to a directory named <var class="keyword varname">archivename</var>. </p>
+
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong> window, browse to the directory where you want to
+						upload the archive.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Select <strong class="ph b">Upload &gt; Zip file</strong>.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">In the box that opens, click <strong class="ph b">Upload a zip file</strong> to browse to and
+						select the archive you want to upload, and then click <strong class="ph b">Open</strong>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_ejf_h3r_2k"><a name="concept_ejf_h3r_2k"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Trash Folder</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <p class="p">File Browser supports the HDFS trash folder (<span class="ph filepath"><var class="keyword varname">home
+              directory</var>/.Trash</span>) to contain files and directories before they
+          are permanently deleted. Files in the folder have the full path of the deleted files (in
+          order to be able to restore them if needed) and checkpoints. The length of time a file or
+          directory stays in the trash depends on HDFS properties. For information on how to
+          configure the HDFS trash folder, see Enabling Trash. in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html</a>.</p>
+
+        
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="concept_ejf_h3r_2k__table_rxy_gdh_b3"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="concept_ejf_h3r_2k__table_rxy_gdh_b3" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+            
+            
+            <thead class="thead" align="left">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" id="d8839e346">Action</th>
+
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" id="d8839e349">Procedure</th>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </thead>
+
+            <tbody class="tbody">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d8839e346 ">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Open</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d8839e349 ">
+                  <div class="p">
+                    <a name="concept_ejf_h3r_2k__ol_idh_ypg_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_ejf_h3r_2k__ol_idh_ypg_dk">
+                      <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong> window, click <a name="concept_ejf_h3r_2k__image_wxl_l3r_2k"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="concept_ejf_h3r_2k__image_wxl_l3r_2k" src="/static/art/help/fbtrash.png"/>.</li>
+
+                    </ol>
+
+                  </div>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d8839e346 ">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Move Files and Directories To</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d8839e349 ">
+                  <div class="p">
+                    <a name="concept_ejf_h3r_2k__ol_k2l_43r_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_ejf_h3r_2k__ol_k2l_43r_2k">
+                      <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong> window, check the
+                        checkbox next to one or more files and directories.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Select <span class="ph menucascade"><span class="ph uicontrol">Delete</span> &gt; <span class="ph uicontrol">Move to trash</span></span></li>
+
+                    </ol>
+
+                  </div>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d8839e346 ">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Empty</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d8839e349 ">
+                  <a name="concept_ejf_h3r_2k__ol_fgd_s3r_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_ejf_h3r_2k__ol_fgd_s3r_2k">
+                    <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong> window, click <a name="concept_ejf_h3r_2k__image_lgd_s3r_2k"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="concept_ejf_h3r_2k__image_lgd_s3r_2k" src="/static/art/help/fbtrash.png"/>.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Click <span class="ph uicontrol">Empty</span>.</li>
+
+                  </ol>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </tbody>
+
+          </table>
+</div>
+
+      </div>
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_3_7"><a name="topic_6_3_7"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Renaming, Moving, Deleting, and
+        Restoring Files and Directories </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="topic_6_3_7__table_rxy_gdh_b3"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="topic_6_3_7__table_rxy_gdh_b3" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+            
+            
+            <thead class="thead" align="left">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" id="d8839e479">Action</th>
+
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" id="d8839e482">Procedure</th>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </thead>
+
+            <tbody class="tbody">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d8839e479 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Rename</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d8839e482 ">
+                  <a name="topic_6_3_7__ol_jy2_1pg_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_6_3_7__ol_jy2_1pg_dk">
+                    <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong>
+                      window, check the checkbox next to the file or directory you want to
+                      rename.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Rename</strong>
+                      button.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Enter the new name and then click <strong class="ph b">Submit</strong>.</li>
+
+                  </ol>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d8839e479 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Move</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d8839e482 ">
+                  <a name="topic_6_3_7__ol_iqj_1pg_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_6_3_7__ol_iqj_1pg_dk">
+                    <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong>
+                      window, check the checkbox next to the file or directory you want to
+                      move.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Move</strong>
+                      button.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Move</strong> dialog
+                      box, browse to or type the new directory, and then click <strong class="ph b">Submit</strong>.</li>
+
+                  </ol>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d8839e479 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Delete</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d8839e482 ">
+                  <a name="topic_6_3_7__ol_w3q_1pg_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_6_3_7__ol_w3q_1pg_dk">
+                    <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong>
+                      window, check the checkbox next to the file or directory you want to delete.
+                      If you select a directory, all of the files and subdirectories contained
+                      within that directory are also deleted.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Choose one of the following:<ul class="ul">
+              <li class="li"><span class="ph menucascade"><span class="ph uicontrol">Delete</span> &gt; <span class="ph uicontrol">Move to trash</span></span></li>
+
+              <li class="li"><span class="ph menucascade"><span class="ph uicontrol">Delete</span> &gt; <span class="ph uicontrol">Delete forever</span></span></li>
+
+            </ul>
+</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Yes</strong> to confirm.
+                      When you move a file to trash it is stored in the .Trash folder in your home
+                      directory. </li>
+
+                  </ol>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d8839e479 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Restore</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d8839e482 ">
+                  <a name="topic_6_3_7__ol_rtc_yhr_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_6_3_7__ol_rtc_yhr_2k">
+                    <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong> window, open the
+                      .Trash folder.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Navigate to the folder containing the file you want to restore.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the file.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Restore</strong>.</li>
+
+                  </ol>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </tbody>
+
+          </table>
+</div>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_3_8"><a name="topic_6_3_8"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Changing a File's or Directory's Owner, Group, or Permissions
+      </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> 
+          <p class="p">
+            Only the Hadoop superuser can change a file's or directory's owner, group, or permissions. The user who
+            starts Hadoop is the Hadoop superuser. The Hadoop superuser account is not necessarily the same as a Hue
+            superuser account. If you create a Hue user (in User Admin) with the same user name and password as the
+            Hadoop superuser, then that Hue user can change a file's or directory's owner, group, or permissions.
+          </p>
+
+        </div>
+
+        
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="topic_6_3_8__table_rxy_gdh_b3"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="topic_6_3_8__table_rxy_gdh_b3" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+            
+            
+            <thead class="thead" align="left">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" id="d8839e682">Change</th>
+
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" id="d8839e685">Procedure</th>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </thead>
+
+            <tbody class="tbody">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d8839e682 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Owner or Group</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d8839e685 ">
+                  <a name="topic_6_3_8__ol_u2r_cpg_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_6_3_8__ol_u2r_cpg_dk">
+                    <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong>
+                      window, check the checkbox next to the select the file or directory whose
+                      owner or group you want to change.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Choose <strong class="ph b">Change
+                        Owner/Group</strong> from the Options menu.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Change
+                        Owner/Group</strong> dialog box: <a name="topic_6_3_8__ul_y4f_4nt_4j"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="topic_6_3_8__ul_y4f_4nt_4j">
+                        <li class="li">Choose the new user from the <strong class="ph b">User</strong> drop-down menu.</li>
+
+                        <li class="li">Choose the new group from the <strong class="ph b">Group</strong> drop-down menu.</li>
+
+                        <li class="li">Check the <strong class="ph b">Recursive</strong> checkbox to propagate the change.</li>
+
+                      </ul>
+</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Submit</strong> to make
+                      the changes.</li>
+
+                  </ol>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d8839e682 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Permissions</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d8839e685 ">
+                  <a name="topic_6_3_8__ol_tbz_cpg_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_6_3_8__ol_tbz_cpg_dk">
+                    <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong>
+                      window, check the checkbox next to the file or directory whose permissions you
+                      want to change.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Change
+                        Permissions</strong> button.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Change
+                        Permissions</strong> dialog box, select the permissions you want to assign and
+                      then click <strong class="ph b">Submit</strong>.</li>
+
+                  </ol>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </tbody>
+
+          </table>
+</div>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_4"><a name="topic_6_4"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Searching for Files and Directories
+    </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p"> To search for files or directories by name using the query search box,
+        enter the name of the file or directory in the query search box. File Browser lists the
+        files or directories matching the search criteria. </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_6_5"><a name="topic_6_5"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Viewing and Editing Files
+    </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <div class="p"> You can view and edit files as text or binary. 
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="topic_6_5__table_rxy_gdh_b3"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="topic_6_5__table_rxy_gdh_b3" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+            
+            
+            <thead class="thead" align="left">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" id="d8839e831">Action</th>
+
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" id="d8839e834">Procedure</th>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </thead>
+
+            <tbody class="tbody">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d8839e831 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">View</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d8839e834 ">
+                  <a name="topic_6_5__ol_rvk_jpg_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_6_5__ol_rvk_jpg_dk">
+                    <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong>
+                      window, click the file you want to view. File Browser displays the first 4,096
+                      bytes of the file in the <strong class="ph b">File Viewer</strong> window.
+                        <a name="topic_6_5__ul_fp5_4nt_4j"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="topic_6_5__ul_fp5_4nt_4j">
+                        <li class="li">If the file is larger than 4,096 bytes, use the
+                          Block navigation buttons (First Block, Previous Block, Next Block, Last
+                          Block) to scroll through the file block by block. The <strong class="ph b">Viewing Bytes</strong> fields show the range of
+                          bytes you are currently viewing.</li>
+
+                        <li class="li">To switch the view from text to binary, click <strong class="ph b">View as Binary</strong> to view a hex dump.</li>
+
+                        <li class="li">To switch the view from binary to text, click <strong class="ph b">View as Text</strong>.</li>
+
+                      </ul>
+</li>
+
+                  </ol>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d8839e831 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Edit</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d8839e834 ">
+                  <a name="topic_6_5__ol_vzs_jpg_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_6_5__ol_vzs_jpg_dk">
+                    <li class="li">If you are viewing a text file, click <strong class="ph b">Edit File</strong>. File Browser displays the contents
+                      of the file in the <strong class="ph b">File Editor</strong> window.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Edit the file and then click <strong class="ph b">Save</strong> or <strong class="ph b">Save
+                        As</strong> to save the file.</li>
+
+                  </ol>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d8839e831 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">View Location in HDFS</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d8839e834 ">Click <strong class="ph b">View File
+                    Location</strong>. File Browser displays the file's location in the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong> window.</td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </tbody>
+
+          </table>
+</div>
+</div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+
+</body>
+</html>

+ 532 - 210
apps/impala/static/help/index.html

@@ -1,213 +1,535 @@
-<h1><a name="ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-IntroducingClouderaImpalaQueryUI"></a>Introducing Cloudera Impala Query UI</h1>
-
-<p>The Cloudera Impala Query UI application enables you to perform queries on Apache Hadoop data stored in HDFS or HBase using Cloudera Impala. For information about Cloudera Impala, see <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/IMPALA10BETADOC/Installing+and+Using+Cloudera+Impala">Installing and Using Impala</a>. You can create, run, and manage queries, and download the results in a Microsoft Office Excel worksheet file or a comma-separated values file. </p>
-
-
-<h2><a name="ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-Contents"></a>Contents</h2>
-
-<style type='text/css'>/*<![CDATA[*/
-div.rbtoc1360778487663 {margin-left: 1.5em;padding: 0px;}
-div.rbtoc1360778487663 ul {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 20px;}
-div.rbtoc1360778487663 li {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 0px;}
-
-/*]]>*/</style><div class='rbtoc1360778487663'>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-IntroducingClouderaImpalaQueryUI'>Introducing Cloudera Impala Query UI</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-ClouderaImpalaQueryUIandInstallationandConfiguration'>Cloudera Impala Query UI and Installation and Configuration</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-StartingClouderaImpalaQueryUI'>Starting Cloudera Impala Query UI</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-WorkingwithQueries'>Working with Queries</a></li>
-<ul>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-CreatingandRunningQueries'>Creating and Running Queries</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-AdvancedQuerySettings'>Advanced Query Settings</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-Viewing%2CEditing%2CorDeletingSavedQueries'>Viewing, Editing, or Deleting Saved Queries</a></li>
-</ul>
-</ul>
-</ul></div>
-<p><br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-
-<h1><a name="ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-ClouderaImpalaQueryUIandInstallationandConfiguration"></a>Cloudera Impala Query UI and Installation and Configuration</h1>
-
-<p>The Cloudera Impala Query UI application is installed and configured as part of Hue. For information about installing and configuring Hue, see <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/CDH4DOC/Hue+Installation">Hue Installation</a>.</p>
-
-<p>The Cloudera Impala Query UI assumes an existing Cloudera Impala installation.  The Hue installation instructions include the configuration necessary for Impala.   You can view the current configuration from from the <b>Settings</b> tab.</p>
-
-<h1><a name="ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-StartingClouderaImpalaQueryUI"></a>Starting Cloudera Impala Query UI</h1>
-
-<p>To start the application, click the <b>Cloudera Impala</b> icon (<span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/impala/static/help/images/23887903.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue browser page.</p>
-
-
-<h1><a name="ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-WorkingwithQueries"></a>Working with Queries</h1>
-
-<p>The Query Editor view lets you create queries in the <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/IMPALA10BETADOC/Language+Reference">Cloudera Impala Query Language</a>, which is based on the Hive Standard Query Language (HiveQL). You can name and save your queries to use later.   When you submit a query, you can either wait for the query to complete, or return later to find the queries in the <b>History</b> view.</p>
-
-<h3><a name="ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-CreatingandRunningQueries"></a>Creating and Running Queries</h3>
-
-<div class='panelMacro'><table class='noteMacro'><colgroup><col width='24'><col></colgroup><tr><td valign='top'><img src="/static/art/help/warning.gif" width="16" height="16" align="absmiddle" alt="" border="0"></td><td><b>Note</b><br />To run a query, you must be logged in to Hue as a user that also has a Unix user account on the remote server.</td></tr></table></div>
-
-<p><b>To create and run a query</b>:</p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>In the Query Editor window, type the query. For example, to select all data from the <em>sample_08</em> table, you would type:
-<div class="code panel" style="border-width: 1px;"><div class="codeContent panelContent">
-<div id="root">
-		<pre class="theme: Default; brush: plain; gutter: false">SELECT * FROM sample_08</pre>
-		</div>
-</div></div></li>
-	<li>In the box to the left of the Query field you can enable users to enter parameters at run-time and request email notification when the job is complete.  See <a href="#ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-AdvancedSettings">Advanced Query Settings</a> for details on using these settings.</li>
-	<li>To save your query and advanced settings to use again later, click <b>Save As,</b> enter a name and description, and then click <b>OK</b>. To save changes to an existing query, click <b>Save.</b></li>
-	<li>To run the query, click <b>Execute</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<a name="ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-QueryResults"></a><br/>
-The Query Results window appears with the results of your query.
-	<ul>
-		<li>To view a log of the query execution, click <b>Log</b> at the top of the results display. You can use the information in this tab to debug your query.</li>
-		<li>To view the query that generated these results, click <b>Query</b> at the top of the results display.</li>
-		<li>To view the columns of the query, click <b>Columns</b>.</li>
-		<li>To return to the query in the Query Editor, click <b>Unsaved Query</b>.</li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<p><a name="ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-AdvancedSettings"></a></p>
-
-<h3><a name="ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-AdvancedQuerySettings"></a>Advanced Query Settings</h3>
-
-<p>The pane to the left of the Query Editor lets you specify the following options:
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-
-<style type="text/css">
-td.confluenceTd {
-border: #dddddd solid 1px;
-height: 36px;
-padding: 5px 10px;
-vertical-align: top;
-}
-th.confluenceTh {
-border: #dddddd solid 1px;
-height: 40px;
-padding: 5px 10px;
-vertical-align: center;
-}
-</style>
-
-
-<div class='table-wrap'>
-<table class='confluenceTable'><tbody>
-<tr>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> Option </th>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> Description </th>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>SETTINGS</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Override the Cloudera Impala default settings. Click <b>Add</b> to configure a new setting. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-»&nbsp;&nbsp; For <b>Key</b>, enter an Impala configuration variable name. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-»&nbsp;&nbsp; For <b>Value</b>, enter the value you want to use for the variable. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />  <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-To view the default settings, click the <b>Settings</b> tab at the top of the page. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>PARAMETERIZATION</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'>  Indicate that a dialog box should display to enter parameter values when a query containing the string $&lt;parametername&gt; is executed. Enabled by default.</td>
-</tr>
-</tbody></table>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE html
+  PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html lang="en-us" xml:lang="en-us">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"/>
+<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="commonltr.css"/>
+<title>Cloudera Impala Query UI</title>
+</head>
+<body id="topic_5"><a name="topic_5"><!-- --></a>
+
+
+
+  <h1 class="title topictitle1">Cloudera Impala Query UI </h1>
+
+
+  <div class="body conbody">
+
+    <p class="p"> The Cloudera Impala Query UI application enables you to perform queries
+      on Apache Hadoop data stored in HDFS or HBase using Cloudera Impala. For information about
+      Cloudera Impala, see <a class="xref" href="../../../../content/support/en/documentation/cloudera-impala/cloudera-impala-documentation-v1-latest.html" target="_blank">Installing and
+        Using Cloudera Impala</a>. You can create, run, and manage queries, and download the
+      results in a Microsoft Office Excel worksheet file or a comma-separated values file. </p>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_5_1"><a name="topic_5_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Cloudera Impala Query UI and Installation and Configuration
+    </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p"> The Cloudera Impala Query UI application is one of the applications
+        installed as part of Hue. <span class="ph">For information about installing and configuring Hue,
+        see Hue Installation in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html</a>.</span></p>
+
+
+      <p class="p"> The Cloudera Impala Query UI assumes an existing Cloudera Impala
+        installation. The Hue installation instructions include the configuration necessary for
+        Impala. You can view the current configuration from the <strong class="ph b">Settings</strong> tab. </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_5_2"><a name="topic_5_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Starting Cloudera Impala Query UI
+    </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">Click the <strong class="ph b">Cloudera Impala Query UI</strong>
+        icon (<img class="image" src="/static/art/help/icon_impala_24.png"/>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue browser page. </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" id="concept_kv5_j13_dk"><a name="concept_kv5_j13_dk"><!-- --></a>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Managing Databases, Tables, and Partitions</h2>
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <p class="p">You can create databases, tables, partitions, and load data by executing
+          <a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/hive/language_manual/data-manipulation-statements.html" target="_blank">Hive data manipulation
+          statements</a> in the Beeswax application.</p>
+
+      <p class="p">You can also use the <a class="xref" href="metastoremanager.html#xd_583c10bfdbd326ba-3ca24a24-13d80143249--7f9b">Metastore Manager</a> application to manage the
+        databases, tables, and partitions and load data.</p>
+
+      <p class="p"> When you change the metastore using one of these applications, you must click the
+          <span class="ph uicontrol">Refresh</span> button under METASTORE CATALOG in the pane to the left of
+        the Query Editor to make the metastore update visible to the Cloudera Impala server. </p>
+
+    </div>
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_4_2_1"><a name="topic_4_2_1"><!-- --></a>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Installing Example Queries and
+      Tables</h2>
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> You must be a superuser to perform this task.</div>
+
+      <a name="topic_4_2_1__ol_kss_btp_wj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_4_2_1__ol_kss_btp_wj">
+        <li class="li">Click <a name="topic_4_2_1__d104e102"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_4_2_1__d104e102" src="/static/art/help/quick_start.png"/>. The Quick Start Wizard opens.</li>
+<li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Step 2:
+            Examples</strong>.</li>
+
+        <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Cloudera Impala Query
+          UI</strong>.</li>
+
+      </ol>
+
+    </div>
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_5_3"><a name="topic_5_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Queries </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p"> The Query Editor view lets you create queries in the Cloudera Impala
+        Query Language, which is based on the Hive Standard Query Language (HiveQL) and described in
+        the Cloudera Impala Language Reference topic in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/Impala/latest/Installing-and-Using-Impala/Installing-and-Using-Impala.html" target="_blank">Installing and
+          Using Cloudera Impala</a>. </p>
+
+      <p class="p">You can name and save your queries to use later. </p>
+
+      <p class="p">When you submit a query, you can either wait for the query to complete,
+        or return later to find the queries in the <strong class="ph b">History</strong> view. </p>
+
+      <p class="p">In the box to the left of the Query field, you can select a database,
+        override the default Cloudera Impala settings, enable users to enter parameters at run-time.
+        See <a class="xref" href="#topic_5_3_2">Advanced Query Settings</a> for details on using these settings. </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_5_3_1"><a name="topic_5_3_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Creating Queries </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+          <li class="li">In the Query Editor window, type a query or
+            multiple queries separated by a semicolon ";".  To be presented with a drop-down of
+            autocomplete options, type <span class="ph uicontrol">CTRL+spacebar</span> when entering a query.  </li>
+
+          <li class="li">To save your query and advanced settings to use
+            again later, click <strong class="ph b">Save As</strong>, enter a name and
+            description, and then click <strong class="ph b">OK</strong>. To save changes to an
+            existing query, click <strong class="ph b">Save.</strong>
+          </li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="id_esc_5sb_zj"><a name="id_esc_5sb_zj"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Loading Queries into the Query Editor</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <a name="id_esc_5sb_zj__d104e186"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="id_esc_5sb_zj__d104e186">
+          <li class="li">Do one of the following:<a name="id_esc_5sb_zj__d104e190"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="id_esc_5sb_zj__d104e190">
+              <li class="li">Click the <span class="ph uicontrol">My Queries</span>  tab.<a name="id_esc_5sb_zj__d104e197"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" type="a" id="id_esc_5sb_zj__d104e197">
+                  <li class="li">Click the <span class="ph uicontrol">Recent Saved Queries</span> or <span class="ph uicontrol">Recent Run
+                      Queries</span> tab to display the respective queries. </li>
+
+                </ol>
+</li>
+
+              <li class="li">Click the <span class="ph uicontrol">Saved Queries</span> tab.</li>
+
+            </ul>
+</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click a query name. The query is loaded into the Query Editor.</li>
+
+        </ol>
+
+      </div>
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_pcv_fpb_zj"><a name="concept_pcv_fpb_zj"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Running Queries</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> To run a query, you must be logged in to
+          Hue as a user that also has a Unix user account on the remote server. </div>
+
+        <a name="concept_pcv_fpb_zj__ol_ofq_xpb_zj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_pcv_fpb_zj__ol_ofq_xpb_zj">
+          <li class="li">To execute a portion of the query, highlight one or more query
+            statements.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Execute</strong>. The Query Results
+            window appears with the results of your query. <a name="concept_pcv_fpb_zj__d104e242"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="concept_pcv_fpb_zj__d104e242">
+              <li class="li">To view a log of the query execution, click <strong class="ph b">Log</strong> at the top of the results display. You can use
+                the information in this tab to debug your query.</li>
+
+              <li class="li">To view the query that generated these results, click <strong class="ph b">Query</strong> at the top of the results display.</li>
+
+              <li class="li">To view the columns of the query, click <strong class="ph b">Columns</strong>.</li>
+
+              <li class="li">To return to the query in the Query Editor, click <strong class="ph b">Unsaved Query</strong>.</li>
+
+            </ul>
+</li>
+
+          <li class="li">If there are multiple statements in the query, click <span class="ph uicontrol">Next</span> in
+            the Multi-statement query pane to execute the remaining statements.</li>
+
+        </ol>
+
+      </div>
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_5_3_2"><a name="topic_5_3_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Advanced Query Settings
+      </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p">
+          The pane to the left of the Query Editor lets you specify the following options:
+        </p>
+
+
+        
+<div class="tablenoborder"><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+            
+            
+            <thead class="thead" align="left">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" id="d7221e304">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Option</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </th>
+
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" id="d7221e313">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Description</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </th>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </thead>
+
+            <tbody class="tbody">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d7221e304 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">DATABASE</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d7221e313 ">
+                  <p class="p">The database containing the table definitions. </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d7221e304 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">SETTINGS</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d7221e313 ">
+                  <div class="p">Override Cloudera Impala default settings. To configure a
+                    new setting: <a name="topic_5_3_2__ol_k5v_hcc_zj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_5_3_2__ol_k5v_hcc_zj">
+                      <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add</strong>.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">For <strong class="ph b">Key</strong>, enter a Cloudera Impala
+                        configuration variable name. </li>
+
+                      <li class="li">For <strong class="ph b">Value</strong>, enter the value you want to
+                        use for the variable. </li>
+
+                    </ol>
+</div>
+
+                  <p class="p">To view the default settings, click the <strong class="ph b">Settings</strong> tab at the top of the page. </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d7221e304 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">PARAMETERIZATION</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d7221e313 ">
+                  <p class="p">Indicate that a dialog box should display to enter parameter
+                    values when a query containing the string $<var class="keyword varname">parametername</var> is
+                    executed. Enabled by default. </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d7221e304 ">
+                  <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">METASTORE CATALOG</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d7221e313 ">
+                  <p class="p">Refresh metadata. It is best to  refresh  metadata after making changes to
+                    databases such as adding or dropping a table.  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </tbody>
+
+          </table>
+</div>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="id_bqm_lxh_dk"><a name="id_bqm_lxh_dk"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Viewing Query History </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p">You can view the history of queries that you have run previously.
+          Results for these queries are available for one week or until Hue is restarted. </p>
+
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">History</strong>. A list of your
+            saved and unsaved queries displays in the Query History window.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">To display the queries for all users, click <strong class="ph b">Show everyone's queries</strong>.
+						To display your queries only, click <strong class="ph b">Show my queries</strong>.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">To display the automatically generated actions performed on a
+            user's behalf, click <strong class="ph b">Show auto actions</strong>. To display
+            user queries again, click <strong class="ph b">Show user queries</strong>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="id_qcp_cxk_xj"><a name="id_qcp_cxk_xj"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Viewing, Editing, Copying, and Deleting
+        Saved Queries </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p">You can view a list of saved queries of all users by clicking <strong class="ph b">My
+            Queries</strong> and then selecting either  <span class="ph uicontrol">Recent Saved Queries</span> or
+            <span class="ph uicontrol">Recent Run Queries</span> tab to display the respective queries or
+          clicking <strong class="ph b">Saved Queries</strong>. You can copy any query, but you
+          can edit, delete, and view the history of only your own queries. </p>
+
+        
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="id_qcp_cxk_xj__d104e691"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="id_qcp_cxk_xj__d104e691" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+            
+            
+            <thead class="thead" align="left">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" id="d7221e501">Saved Query</th>
+
+                <th class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" id="d7221e504">Procedure</th>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </thead>
+
+            <tbody class="tbody">
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d7221e501 ">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Edit</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d7221e504 ">
+                  <div class="p">
+                    <a name="id_qcp_cxk_xj__d104e728"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="id_qcp_cxk_xj__d104e728">
+                      <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Saved Queries</strong>.
+                        The Queries window displays.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the query and click <strong class="ph b">Edit</strong>. The query displays in the Query
+                        Editor window.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Change the query and then click <strong class="ph b">Save.</strong> You can also click <strong class="ph b">Save As</strong>, enter a new name, and click <strong class="ph b">OK</strong> to save a copy of the query.</li>
+
+                    </ol>
+
+                  </div>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d7221e501 ">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Copy</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d7221e504 ">
+                  <div class="p">
+                    <a name="id_qcp_cxk_xj__d104e773"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="id_qcp_cxk_xj__d104e773">
+                      <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Saved Queries</strong>.
+                        The Queries window displays.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the query and click <strong class="ph b">Copy</strong>. The query displays in the Query
+                        Editor window.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Change the query as necessary and then click <strong class="ph b">Save.</strong> You can also click <strong class="ph b">Save As</strong>, enter a new name, and click <strong class="ph b">OK</strong> to save a copy of the query.</li>
+
+                    </ol>
+
+                  </div>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d7221e501 ">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Copy in Query History</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d7221e504 ">
+                  <div class="p">
+                    <a name="id_qcp_cxk_xj__d104e818"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="id_qcp_cxk_xj__d104e818">
+                      <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">History</strong>. The
+                        Query History window displays.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">To display the queries for all users, click <strong class="ph b">Show everyone's queries</strong>. The queries for
+                        all users display in the History window.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Click the query you want to copy. A copy of the query
+                        displays in the Query Editor window.</li>
+
+                      <li class="li">Change the query, if necessary, and then click <strong class="ph b">Save As</strong>, enter a new name, and click <strong class="ph b">OK</strong> to save the query.</li>
+
+                    </ol>
+
+                  </div>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+              <tr class="row">
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%" headers="d7221e501 ">
+                  <p class="p">
+                    <strong class="ph b">Delete</strong>
+                  </p>
+
+                </td>
+
+                <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%" headers="d7221e504 ">
+                  <a name="id_qcp_cxk_xj__d104e861"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="id_qcp_cxk_xj__d104e861">
+                    <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Saved Queries</strong>.
+                      The Queries window displays.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the query and click <strong class="ph b">Delete</strong>.</li>
+
+                    <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Yes</strong> to confirm
+                      the deletion.</li>
+
+                  </ol>
+
+                </td>
+
+              </tr>
+
+            </tbody>
+
+          </table>
 </div>
 
 
-<h3><a name="ClouderaImpalaQueryUI-Viewing%2CEditing%2CorDeletingSavedQueries"></a>Viewing, Editing, or Deleting Saved Queries</h3>
-
-<p>You can view a list of saved queries of all users by clicking <b>Saved Queries</b>. You can copy any user's query, but you can only edit, delete, and view the history of your own queries.</p>
-
-<p><b>To edit a saved query:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>In the Cloudera Impala window, click <b>Saved Queries</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The Queries window displays.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Options</b> button next to the query and choose <b>Edit</b> from the context menu.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The Query Editor window displays.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Change the query and then click <b>Save.</b> You can also click <b>Save As</b>, enter a new name, and click <b>OK</b> to save a copy of the query.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<p><b>To delete a saved query:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>Click <b>Saved Queries</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The Queries window displays.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Options</b> button next to the query and choose <b>Delete</b> from the context menu.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click <b>Yes</b> to confirm the deletion.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<p><b>To copy a saved query:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>Click <b>Saved Queries</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The Queries window displays.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Options</b> button next to the query and choose <b>Clone</b> from the context menu.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The Query Editor window displays.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Change the query as necessary and then click <b>Save.</b> You can also click <b>Save As</b>, enter a new name, and click <b>Ok</b> to save a copy of the query.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<p><b>To copy a query in the Query History window:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>Click <b>History</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The Query History window displays.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To display the queries for all users, click <b>Show everyone's queries</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The queries for all users displays in the Query History window.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Clone</b> link next to the query you want to copy.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-A copy of the query displays in the Query Editor window.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Change the query, if necessary, and then click <b>Save As</b>, enter a new name, and click <b>OK</b> to save the query.</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-				    					    <br/>
-                        </td>
-		    </tr>
-	    </table>
-	
-    </body>
-</html>
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+
+</body>
+</html>

+ 209 - 108
apps/jobbrowser/static/help/index.html

@@ -1,150 +1,251 @@
-<h1><a name="JobBrowser-IntroducingJobBrowser"></a>Introducing Job Browser</h1>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE html
+  PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html lang="en-us" xml:lang="en-us">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"/>
+<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="commonltr.css"/>
+<title>Job Browser</title>
+</head>
+<body id="topic_7"><a name="topic_7"><!-- --></a>
 
-<p>The Job Browser application lets you to examine the Hadoop MapReduce jobs running on your Hadoop cluster. Job Browser presents the job and tasks in layers. The top layer is a list of jobs, and you can link to a list of that job's tasks. You can then view a task's attempts and the properties of each attempt, such as state, start and end time, and output size. To troubleshoot failed jobs, you can also view the logs of each attempt.</p>
 
 
+  <h1 class="title topictitle1">Job Browser </h1>
 
 
-<h2><a name="JobBrowser-Contents"></a>Contents</h2>
+  <div class="body conbody">
 
-<style type='text/css'>/*<![CDATA[*/
-div.rbtoc1359395622915 {margin-left: 1.5em;padding: 0px;}
-div.rbtoc1359395622915 ul {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 20px;}
-div.rbtoc1359395622915 li {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 0px;}
+    <p class="p" id="topic_7__p_65"><a name="topic_7__p_65"><!-- --></a>
+      The Job Browser application lets you to examine the Hadoop MapReduce jobs running on your Hadoop cluster. Job
+      Browser presents the job and tasks in layers. The top layer is a list of jobs, and you can link to a list of that
+      job's tasks. You can then view a task's attempts and the properties of each attempt, such as state, start and end
+      time, and output size. To troubleshoot failed jobs, you can also view the logs of each attempt.
+    </p>
 
-/*]]>*/</style><div class='rbtoc1359395622915'>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#JobBrowser-IntroducingJobBrowser'>Introducing Job Browser</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobBrowser-JobBrowserInstallationandConfiguration'>Job Browser Installation and Configuration</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobBrowser-StartingJobBrowser'>Starting Job Browser</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobBrowser-FilteringtheJobBrowserList'>Filtering the Job Browser List</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobBrowser-ViewingJobInformationandLogs'>Viewing Job Information and Logs</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobBrowser-ViewingJobOutput'>Viewing Job Output</a></li>
-</ul></div>
-<p><br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<a name="JobBrowser-JobBrowserInstallationandConfiguration"></a></p>
 
-<h1><a name="JobBrowser-JobBrowserInstallationandConfiguration"></a>Job Browser Installation and Configuration</h1>
+  </div>
 
-<p>Job Browser is one of the applications that is installed as part of Hue. For information about installing and configuring Hue, see <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/CDHDOC/Hue+Installation">Hue Installation</a>.</p>
 
-<p>Job Browser can display both MRv1 and MRv2 jobs, but must be configured to display one type at a time in the <tt>[mapred_clusters]</tt> and <tt>[yarn_clusters]</tt> sections in the Hue configuration file.</p>
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_7_1"><a name="topic_7_1"><!-- --></a>
 
-<p>By default, a JobBrowser user can see submitted job information for all users &#8211; both his/her own jobs and those of other users. To restrict viewing of submitted jobs to the job submitter and Hue administrators, set the <tt>share_jobs</tt> property under the <tt>[jobbrowser]</tt> section in the Hue configuration file to <tt>false</tt>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">
+      Job Browser Installation and Configuration
+    </h2>
 
-<p><a name="JobBrowser-StartingJobBrowser"></a></p>
 
-<h1><a name="JobBrowser-StartingJobBrowser"></a>Starting Job Browser</h1>
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <p class="p">Job Browser is one of the applications installed as part of Hue. <span class="ph">For information about installing and configuring Hue,
+        see Hue Installation in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html</a>.</span></p>
 
-<p>To start Job Browser, click the <b>Job Browser</b> icon (<span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/jobbrowser/static/help/images/23888158.png" height="26" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue web page.</p>
+      <p class="p">Job Browser can display both MRv1 and MRv2 jobs, but must be configured
+        to display one type at a time. See MapReduce (MRv1) and YARN (MRv2) Cluster Configuration in
+          <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">CDH4
+          Installation</a>.</p>
 
-<p>If there are no jobs that have been run, the <b>Welcome to the Job Browser</b> page opens, with links to the Job Designer and Beeswax.</p>
+    </div>
 
-<p>If there are jobs running, then the Job Browser list appears.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
 
-<p><a name="JobBrowser-FilteringtheJobBrowserList"></a></p>
+  </div>
 
-<h1><a name="JobBrowser-FilteringtheJobBrowserList"></a>Filtering the Job Browser List</h1>
 
-<p><b>To filter the jobs displayed in the Job Browser list:</b></p>
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_7_2"><a name="topic_7_2"><!-- --></a>
 
-<ul>
-	<li>To filter the jobs by their state (such as <b>Running</b> or <b>Completed</b>), choose a state from the <b>Job status</b> drop-down menu.</li>
-	<li>To filter by a user who ran the jobs, enter the user's name in the <b>User Name</b> query box.</li>
-	<li>To filter by job name, enter the name in the <b>Text</b> query box.</li>
-	<li>To clear the filters, choose <b>All States</b> from the <b>Job status</b> drop-down menu and delete any text in the <b>User Name</b> and <b>Text</b> query boxes.</li>
-	<li>To display retired jobs, check the <b>Show retired jobs</b> checkbox. Retired jobs show somewhat limited information &#8211; for example, information on maps and reduces and job duration is not available. Jobs are designated as&nbsp;Retired by the JobTracker based on the value of <tt>mapred.jobtracker.retirejob.interval</tt>. The retired jobs no longer display after the JobTracker is restarted.</li>
-</ul>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">
+      Starting Job Browser
+    </h2>
 
 
-<p><a name="JobBrowser-ViewingJobInformationandLogs"></a></p>
+    <div class="body conbody">
 
-<h1><a name="JobBrowser-ViewingJobInformationandLogs"></a>Viewing Job Information and Logs</h1>
+      <p class="p">Click the <strong class="ph b">Job Browser</strong> icon (<img class="image" src="/static/art/help/icon_jobbrowser_24.png"/>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue web page. </p>
 
-<div class='panelMacro'><table class='noteMacro'><colgroup><col width='24'><col></colgroup><tr><td valign='top'><img src="/static/art/help/warning.gif" width="16" height="16" align="absmiddle" alt="" border="0"></td><td>At any level you can view the log for an object by click the <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/oozie/static/help/images/23888324.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span> icon in the Logs column.</td></tr></table></div>
 
-<p><b>To view job information for an individual job:</b></p>
+      <p class="p">
+        If there are no jobs that have been run, the <strong class="ph b">Welcome to the Job Browser</strong> page opens, with links to the Job
+        Designer and Beeswax.
+      </p>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Browser</b> window, click <b>View</b> at the right of the job you want to view.<br/>
-This shows the <b>Job</b> page for the job, with the recent tasks associated with the job are displayed in the <b>Tasks</b> tab.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Metadata</b> tab to view the metadata for this job.</li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Counters</b> tab to view the counter metrics for the job.</li>
-</ol>
 
+      <p class="p" id="topic_7_2__p_67"><a name="topic_7_2__p_67"><!-- --></a>
+        If there are jobs running, then the Job Browser list appears.
+      </p>
 
-<p><b>To view details about the tasks associated with the job:</b></p>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>Job</b> window, click the <b>View All Tasks</b> link at the right just above the <b>Recent Tasks</b> list.<br/>
-This lists all the tasks associated with the job.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click <b>Attempts</b> to the right of a task to view the attempts for that task.</li>
-</ol>
+    </div>
 
 
-<p><b>To view information about an individual task:</b></p>
+  </div>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>in the <b>Job</b> window, click the <b>View</b> link to the right of the task.<br/>
-The attempts associated with the task are displayed.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Metadata</b> tab to view metadata for this task.<br/>
-The metadata associated with the task is displayed.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To view the Hadoop counters for a task, click the <b>Counters</b> tab.<br/>
-The counters associated with the task are displayed.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To return to the <b>Job</b> window for this job, click the job number in the status panel at the left of the window.</li>
-</ol>
 
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_7_3"><a name="topic_7_3"><!-- --></a>
 
-<p><b>To view details about a task attempt:</b></p>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">
+      Filtering the Job Browser List
+    </h2>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Task</b> window, click the <b>View</b> link to the right of the task attempt.<br/>
-The metadata associated with the attempt is displayed under the <b>Metadata</b> tab.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To view the Hadoop counters for the task attempt, click the <b>Counters</b> tab.<br/>
-The counters associated with the attempt are displayed.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To view the logs associated with the task attempt, click the <b>Logs</b> tab.<br/>
-The logs associated with the task attempt are displayed.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To return to the list of tasks for the current job, click the task number in the status panel at the left of the window.</li>
-</ol>
 
+    <div class="body conbody">
 
-<p><a name="JobBrowser-ViewingJobOutput"></a></p>
+      <ul class="ul">
 
-<h1><a name="JobBrowser-ViewingJobOutput"></a>Viewing Job Output</h1>
+        <li class="li">To filter the jobs by their state (such as <strong class="ph b">Running</strong> or <strong class="ph b">Completed</strong>), choose a state from the <strong class="ph b">Job status</strong> drop-down menu.</li>
 
-<p><b>To view job output:</b></p>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Browser</b> window, click the link in the ID column.</li>
-	<li>To view the output of the job, click the link under <b>OUTPUT</b> in the panel at the left of the window.<br/>
-This takes you to the job output directory in the <b>File Browser</b>.</li>
-</ol>
+        <li class="li">To filter by a user who ran the jobs, enter the user's name in the <strong class="ph b">User Name</strong> query box.</li>
 
 
-				    					    <br/>
-                        </td>
-		    </tr>
-	    </table>
-	    
-    </body>
-</html>
+        <li class="li">To filter by job name, enter the name in the <strong class="ph b">Text</strong> query box.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">To clear the filters, choose <strong class="ph b">All States</strong> from the <strong class="ph b">Job status</strong> drop-down menu and delete any text in the <strong class="ph b">User Name</strong> and <strong class="ph b">Text</strong> query boxes.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li" id="topic_7_3__li_68"><a name="topic_7_3__li_68"><!-- --></a>To display retired jobs, check the <strong class="ph b">Show retired jobs</strong> checkbox. Retired jobs show somewhat limited information – for example, information on maps and reduces and job duration is not available. Jobs are designated as Retired by the JobTracker based on the value of <samp class="ph codeph">mapred.jobtracker.retirejob.interval</samp>. The retired jobs no longer display after the JobTracker is restarted.</li>
+
+
+      </ul>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_7_4"><a name="topic_7_4"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">
+      Viewing Job Information and Logs
+    </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span>  At any level you can view the log for an object by clicking the
+          <a name="topic_7_4__image_ym1_fy5_wj"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_7_4__image_ym1_fy5_wj" src="/static/art/help/log.png"/> icon in the Logs column. </div>
+
+
+      <p class="p">
+        <strong class="ph b">To view job information for an individual job:</strong>
+      </p>
+
+
+      <ol class="ol">
+
+        <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Browser</strong> window, click <strong class="ph b">View</strong> at the right of the job you want to view.
+This shows the <strong class="ph b">Job</strong> page for the job, with the recent tasks associated with the job are displayed in the <strong class="ph b">Tasks</strong> tab.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Metadata</strong> tab to view the metadata for this job.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Counters</strong> tab to view the counter metrics for the job.</li>
+
+
+      </ol>
+
+
+      <p class="p">
+        <strong class="ph b">To view details about the tasks associated with the job:</strong>
+      </p>
+
+
+      <ol class="ol">
+
+        <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job</strong> window, click the <strong class="ph b">View All Tasks</strong> link at the right just above the <strong class="ph b">Recent Tasks</strong> list.
+This lists all the tasks associated with the job.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Attempts</strong> to the right of a task to view the attempts for that task.</li>
+
+
+      </ol>
+
+
+      <p class="p">
+        <strong class="ph b">To view information about an individual task:</strong>
+      </p>
+
+
+      <ol class="ol">
+
+        <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job</strong> window, click the <strong class="ph b">View</strong> link to the right of the task.
+The attempts associated with the task are displayed.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Metadata</strong> tab to view metadata for this task.
+The metadata associated with the task is displayed.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">To view the Hadoop counters for a task, click the <strong class="ph b">Counters</strong> tab.
+The counters associated with the task are displayed.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">To return to the <strong class="ph b">Job</strong> window for this job, click the job number in the status panel at the left of the window.</li>
+
+
+      </ol>
+
+
+      <p class="p">
+        <strong class="ph b">To view details about a task attempt:</strong>
+      </p>
+
+
+      <ol class="ol">
+
+        <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Task</strong> window, click the <strong class="ph b">View</strong> link to the right of the task attempt.
+The metadata associated with the attempt is displayed under the <strong class="ph b">Metadata</strong> tab.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">To view the Hadoop counters for the task attempt, click the <strong class="ph b">Counters</strong> tab.
+The counters associated with the attempt are displayed.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">To view the logs associated with the task attempt, click the <strong class="ph b">Logs</strong> tab.
+The logs associated with the task attempt are displayed.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li" id="topic_7_4__li_69"><a name="topic_7_4__li_69"><!-- --></a>To return to the list of tasks for the current job, click the task number in the status panel at the left of the window.</li>
+
+
+      </ol>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_7_5"><a name="topic_7_5"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">
+      Viewing Job Output
+    </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <ol class="ol">
+
+        <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Browser</strong> window, click the link in the ID column.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">To view the output of the job, click the link under <strong class="ph b">OUTPUT</strong> in the panel at the left of the window.
+This takes you to the job output directory in the <strong class="ph b">File Browser</strong>.</li>
+
+
+      </ol>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+
+</body>
+</html>

+ 1124 - 288
apps/jobsub/static/help/index.html

@@ -1,335 +1,1171 @@
-<h1><a name="JobDesigner-IntroducingJobDesigner"></a>Introducing Job Designer</h1>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE html
+  PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html lang="en-us" xml:lang="en-us">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"/>
+<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="commonltr.css"/>
+<title>Job Designer</title>
+</head>
+<body id="topic_8"><a name="topic_8"><!-- --></a>
 
-<p>The Job Designer application enables you to create and submit Hadoop MapReduce jobs to the Hadoop cluster. You can include variables with your jobs to enable you and other users to enter values for the variables when they run your job. The Job Designer supports MapReduce, streaming, and Java jobs. For more information about Hadoop MapReduce, see the <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/SUPPORT/Hadoop+Tutorial">Hadoop Tutorial</a>.</p>
 
-<div class='panelMacro'><table class='noteMacro'><colgroup><col width='24'><col></colgroup><tr><td valign='top'><img src="/static/art/help/warning.gif" width="16" height="16" align="absmiddle" alt="" border="0"></td><td><b>Note</b><br /><ul>
-	<li>Job Designer uses Oozie to submit MapReduce jobs.  Therefore, Oozie must be installed and configured before you can use JobDesigner. For information about installing Oozie, see <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/CDH4DOC/Oozie+Installation">Oozie Installation</a>.</li>
-	<li>In order to run Streaming jobs as part of a workflow, Oozie must be configured to use the Oozie ShareLib.</li>
-	<li>A job's input files must be uploaded to the cluster before you can submit the job.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-</ul>
-</td></tr></table></div>
 
+	<h1 class="title topictitle1">Job Designer </h1>
 
 
-<h2><a name="JobDesigner-Contents"></a>Contents</h2>
+	<div class="body conbody">
 
-<style type='text/css'>/*<![CDATA[*/
-div.rbtoc1359395639176 {margin-left: 1.5em;padding: 0px;}
-div.rbtoc1359395639176 ul {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 20px;}
-div.rbtoc1359395639176 li {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 0px;}
+		<p class="p">The Job Designer application enables you to create and submit jobs to the
+			Hadoop cluster. You can include variables with your jobs to enable you and other users
+			to enter values for the variables when they run your job. The Job Designer supports the
+			actions supported by <a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/oozie/" target="_blank">Oozie</a>: <a class="xref" href="../../../../content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/HadoopTutorial/CDH4/index.html" target="_blank">MapReduce</a>, Streaming, Java, Pig, Hive, Sqoop, Shell, Ssh, DistCp, Fs, and
+			Email. </p>
 
-/*]]>*/</style><div class='rbtoc1359395639176'>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-IntroducingJobDesigner'>Introducing Job Designer</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-JobDesignerInstallationandConfiguration'>Job Designer Installation and Configuration</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-StartingJobDesigner'>Starting Job Designer</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-InstallingtheSampleJobDesigns'>Installing the Sample Job Designs</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-JobDesigns'>Job Designs</a></li>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-FilteringJobDesigns'>Filtering Job Designs</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-JobDesignSettings'>Job Design Settings</a></li>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-CommonSettings'>Common Settings</a></li>
-</ul>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-CreatingaMapReduceJobDesign'>Creating a MapReduce Job Design</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-CreatingaStreamingJobDesign'>Creating a Streaming Job Design</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-CreatingaJavaJobDesign'>Creating a Java Job Design</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-SubmittingaJobDesign'>Submitting a Job Design</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-Copying%2CEditing%2CandDeletingaJobDesign'>Copying, Editing, and Deleting a Job Design</a></li>
-</ul>
-    <li><a href='#JobDesigner-DisplayingResultsofSubmittingaJob'>Displaying Results of Submitting a Job</a></li>
-</ul></div>
-<p><br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-
-<p><a name="JobDesigner-JobDesignerInstallationandConfiguration"></a></p>
-
-<h1><a name="JobDesigner-JobDesignerInstallationandConfiguration"></a>Job Designer Installation and Configuration</h1>
-
-<p>Job Designer is one of the applications that is installed as part of Hue. For information about installing and configuring Hue, see <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/CDH4DOC/Hue+Installation">Hue Installation</a>.</p>
-
-<p><a name="JobDesigner-StartingJobDesigner"></a></p>
-
-<h1><a name="JobDesigner-StartingJobDesigner"></a>Starting Job Designer</h1>
-
-<p>To start Job Designer, click the <b>Job Designer</b> icon ( <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/jobsub/static/art/icon.png" height="30" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue web page. The <b>Job Designs</b> page opens in the browser.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-
-<p><a name="JobDesigner-InstallingtheJobDesignerSamples"></a></p>
-
-<h1><a name="JobDesigner-InstallingtheSampleJobDesigns"></a>Installing the Sample Job Designs</h1>
-
-<p>The Job Designer sample job designs can help you learn how to use Job Designer.&nbsp;To install the sample job designs, click <b>Install Samples</b> in the <b>Job Designs</b> window and then click <b>Yes</b>. The sample job designs are displayed in the <b>Job Designs</b> window. Job Designer removes the <b>Install Samples</b> button after the samples are installed so you can only install the samples once.&nbsp;</p>
-
-<p><a name="JobDesigner-WorkingwithJobDesigns"></a></p>
-
-<h1><a name="JobDesigner-JobDesigns"></a>Job Designs</h1>
-
-<p>A job design specifies several meta-level properties of a MapReduce job, including the job design name, description, the MapReduce executable scripts or classes, and any parameters for those scripts or classes. You can create three types of job designs:&nbsp;<a href="#JobDesigner-CreatingaMapreducedesign">MapReduce</a>, <a href="#JobDesigner-CreatingaStreamingJobDesign">streaming</a>, and <a href="#JobDesigner-CreatingaJavaJobDesign">Java</a>.</p>
-
-<h2><a name="JobDesigner-FilteringJobDesigns"></a>Filtering Job Designs</h2>
-
-<p>You can filter the job designs that appear in the list by owner, name, type, and description.&nbsp;</p>
-
-<p><b>To filter the Job Designs list:</b></p>
-<ol>
-	<li>In the&nbsp;<b>Job Designs</b>&nbsp;window, click&nbsp;<b>Designs</b>.</li>
-	<li>Enter text in the Filter text box at the top of the&nbsp;<b>Job Designs</b>&nbsp;window.&nbsp;When you type in the Filter field, the designs are dynamically filtered to display only those rows containing text that matches the specified substring.<br/>
-<a name="JobDesigner-DisplayingJobResults"></a></li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<h2><a name="JobDesigner-JobDesignSettings"></a>Job Design Settings</h2>
-
-<p>All job design settings except Name and Description support the use of variables of the form&nbsp;<tt>$</tt><tt><em>variable_name</em></tt>. When you run the job, a dialog box will appear to enable you to specify the values of the variables.</p>
-
-<h3><a name="JobDesigner-CommonSettings"></a>Common Settings</h3>
-
-<p>All job design types support the settings listed in the following table.&nbsp;</p>
-
-
-<style type="text/css">
-td.confluenceTd {
-border: #dddddd solid 1px;
-height: 36px;
-padding: 5px 10px;
-vertical-align: top;
-}
-th.confluenceTh {
-border: #dddddd solid 1px;
-height: 40px;
-padding: 5px 10px;
-vertical-align: center;
-}
-</style>
-
-
-<div class='table-wrap'>
-<table class='confluenceTable'><tbody>
-<tr>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> Setting </th>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> Description </th>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Name</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Identifies the job and its collection of properties and parameters. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Description</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> A description of the job. The description is displayed in the dialog box that appears if you specify variables for the job. <br class="atl-forced-newline" /> </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Job Properties</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Job properties. To set a property value, click&nbsp;<b>Add Property</b>.&nbsp;&nbsp; <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<ul>
-	<li><b>Property name -</b> a&nbsp;configuration property name. This field provides auto-completion, so you can type the first few characters of a property name and then select the one you want from the drop-down list.&nbsp;</li>
-	<li><b>Value -</b> the property value.</li>
-</ul>
-</td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Files</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Files to pass to the job. Equivalent to the Hadoop <tt>-files</tt> option.&nbsp; <br class="atl-forced-newline" /> </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Archives</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Archives to pass to the job. Equivalent to the Hadoop <tt>-archives</tt> option. <br class="atl-forced-newline" /> </td>
-</tr>
-</tbody></table>
+
+	</div>
+
+
+	<div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_8_1"><a name="topic_8_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+		<h2 class="title topictitle2">Job Designer Installation and Configuration </h2>
+
+
+		<div class="body conbody">
+
+			<p class="p">Job Designer is one of the applications installed as part of Hue. <span class="ph">For information about installing and configuring Hue,
+        see Hue Installation in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html</a>.</span></p>
+
+			<p class="p">In order to run DistCp, Streaming, Pig, Sqoop, and Hive
+      jobs, Oozie must be configured to use the Oozie ShareLib. See Oozie Installation in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html</a>. </p>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+
+	</div>
+
+
+	<div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_8_2"><a name="topic_8_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+		<h2 class="title topictitle2">Starting Job Designer </h2>
+
+
+		<div class="body conbody">
+
+			<p class="p">Click the <strong class="ph b">Job Designer</strong> icon (<img class="image" src="/static/art/help/icon_jobsub_24.png"/>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue web page.
+				The <strong class="ph b">Job Designs</strong> page opens in the browser. </p>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+
+	</div>
+
+
+	<div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_8_3"><a name="topic_8_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+		<h2 class="title topictitle2">Installing the Example Job Designs </h2>
+
+
+		<div class="body conbody">
+			<div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> You must be a superuser to perform this task.</div>
+
+			<a name="topic_8_3__ol_ebx_xng_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_8_3__ol_ebx_xng_dk">
+				<li class="li">Click <a name="topic_8_3__d104e102"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_8_3__d104e102" src="/static/art/help/quick_start.png"/>. The Quick Start Wizard opens.</li>
+<li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Step 2:
+            Examples</strong>.</li>
+
+				<li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Job Designer</strong>.</li>
+
+			</ol>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+
+	</div>
+
+
+	<div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_8_4"><a name="topic_8_4"><!-- --></a>
+
+		<h2 class="title topictitle2">Job Designs </h2>
+
+
+		<div class="body conbody">
+
+			<p class="p">A job design specifies several meta-level properties of a job, including
+				the job design name, description, the executable scripts or classes, and any
+				parameters for those scripts or classes. </p>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+
+		<div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_8_4_1"><a name="topic_8_4_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+			<h3 class="title topictitle3">Filtering Job Designs </h3>
+
+
+			<div class="body conbody">
+
+				<p class="p">You can filter the job designs that appear in the list by owner, name, type, and
+					description.  </p>
+
+
+				<p class="p">
+					<strong class="ph b">To filter the Job Designs list:</strong>
+				</p>
+
+
+				<ol class="ol">
+
+					<li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Designs</strong> window, click <strong class="ph b">Designs</strong>.</li>
+
+
+					<li class="li" id="topic_8_4_1__li_81"><a name="topic_8_4_1__li_81"><!-- --></a>Enter text in the Filter text box at the top of the <strong class="ph b">Job
+							Designs</strong> window. When you type in the Filter field, the designs are
+						dynamically filtered to display only those rows containing text that matches
+						the specified substring.</li>
+
+
+				</ol>
+
+
+			</div>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+		<div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_jkv_qf3_zj"><a name="concept_jkv_qf3_zj"><!-- --></a>
+			<h3 class="title topictitle3">Creating a Job Design</h3>
+
+			<div class="body conbody">
+				<a name="concept_jkv_qf3_zj__ol_xmj_5f3_zj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_jkv_qf3_zj__ol_xmj_5f3_zj">
+					<li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Designs</strong>
+						window, click <span class="ph menucascade"><span class="ph uicontrol">New Action</span> &gt; <span class="ph uicontrol"><var class="keyword varname">Action</var></span></span>, where <var class="keyword varname">Action</var> is MapReduce, Streaming,
+						Java, Pig, Hive, Sqoop, Shell, Ssh, DistCp, Fs, or Email.</li>
+
+					<li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Design
+								(<var class="keyword varname">Action</var> type)</strong> window, specify the common and
+						job type specific information.  </li>
+
+					<li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Save</strong> to save the
+						job settings.</li>
+
+				</ol>
+
+			</div>
+
+		</div>
+
+		<div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_rfg_wfr_2k"><a name="concept_rfg_wfr_2k"><!-- --></a>
+			<h3 class="title topictitle3">Deleting and Restoring Job Designs</h3>
+
+			<div class="body conbody">
+				<p class="p">You can move job designs to the trash and later restore or permanently delete
+					them.</p>
+
+				<div class="section" id="concept_rfg_wfr_2k__section_xny_zfr_2k"><a name="concept_rfg_wfr_2k__section_xny_zfr_2k"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Deleting Job Designs</h4>
+					
+					<a name="concept_rfg_wfr_2k__ol_rk2_fgr_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_rfg_wfr_2k__ol_rk2_fgr_2k">
+						<li class="li">In a Manager screen, check the checkbox next to one or more job
+							designs.</li>
+
+						<li class="li">Choose one of the following:<ul class="ul">
+              <li class="li"><span class="ph menucascade"><span class="ph uicontrol">Delete</span> &gt; <span class="ph uicontrol">Move to trash</span></span></li>
+
+              <li class="li"><span class="ph menucascade"><span class="ph uicontrol">Delete</span> &gt; <span class="ph uicontrol">Delete forever</span></span></li>
+
+            </ul>
+</li>
+
+					</ol>
+
+				</div>
+
+				<div class="section" id="concept_rfg_wfr_2k__section_i5h_1gr_2k"><a name="concept_rfg_wfr_2k__section_i5h_1gr_2k"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Restoring Job Designs</h4>
+					
+					<a name="concept_rfg_wfr_2k__ol_rrt_kgr_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_rfg_wfr_2k__ol_rrt_kgr_2k">
+						<li class="li">In a Manager screen, click <a name="concept_rfg_wfr_2k__d238e349"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="concept_rfg_wfr_2k__d238e349" src="/static/art/help/trash.png"/>
+            <strong class="ph b">Trash</strong>.</li>
+
+						<li class="li">Check the checkbox next to one or more job designs.</li>
+
+						<li class="li">Click <span class="ph uicontrol">Restore</span>.</li>
+
+					</ol>
+
+				</div>
+
+			</div>
+
+		</div>
+
+		<div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj"><!-- --></a>
+			<h3 class="title topictitle3">Job Design Settings</h3>
+
+			<div class="body conbody">
+				<div class="section" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_zt2_w33_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_zt2_w33_zj"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Job Design Common
+						Settings </h4>
+					
+					<p class="p">Most job design types support all the settings listed in the following
+						table.  For job type specific settings, see: <a class="xref" href="#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_lvq_ch3_zj">MapReduce</a>, <a class="xref" href="#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_zrd_gh3_zj">Streaming</a>, <a class="xref" href="#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_abl_hh3_zj">Java</a>, <a class="xref" href="#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_tvm_3h3_zj">Pig</a>, <a class="xref" href="#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_lxq_3h3_zj">Hive</a>, <a class="xref" href="#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_xb5_3h3_zj">Sqoop</a>, <a class="xref" href="#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_xvw_3h3_zj">Shell</a>, <a class="xref" href="#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_tnz_3h3_zj">Ssh</a>, <a class="xref" href="#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_qsc_jh3_zj">DistCp</a>, <a class="xref" href="#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_hx4_lh3_zj">Fs</a>, and <a class="xref" href="#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_qjt_lh3_zj">Email</a>. </p>
+
+					<p class="p">All job design settings except Name and Description
+						support the use of variables of the form <samp class="ph codeph">$</samp><var class="keyword varname">variable_name</var>. When you run the job, a
+						dialog box will appear to enable you to specify the values of the variables. </p>
+
+					
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_skf_x33_zj"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_skf_x33_zj" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+							
+							
+							<tbody class="tbody">
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p">
+											<strong class="ph b">Name</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+										<p class="p">Identifies the job and its collection
+											of properties and parameters. </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p">
+											<strong class="ph b">Description</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+										<p class="p">A description of the job. The
+											description is displayed in the dialog box that appears
+											if you specify variables for the job. </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p">
+											<strong class="ph b">Advanced</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+										<a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__ul_pyd_nf3_zj"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__ul_pyd_nf3_zj">
+											<li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Is shared</strong> -
+												Indicate whether to share the action with all
+												users.</li>
+
+											<li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Oozie parameters</strong> - </li>
+
+										</ul>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p">
+											<strong class="ph b">Prepare</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">Specifies paths to create or delete before starting the
+										workflow job. </td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p">
+											<strong class="ph b">Params</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">Parameters to pass to a script or command.  The parameters
+										are expressed using the  <a class="xref" href="http://jcp.org/aboutJava/communityprocess/final/jsr152/" target="_blank">JSP
+											2.0 Specification (JSP.2.3) Expression Language</a>,
+										allowing variables, functions, and complex expressions as
+										parameters. </td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p">
+											<strong class="ph b">Job Properties</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+										<p class="p">Job properties. To set a property
+											value, click <strong class="ph b">Add
+												Property</strong>.   </p>
+
+										<a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__ul_jlf_x33_zj"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__ul_jlf_x33_zj">
+											<li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Property name -</strong> a configuration
+												property name. This field provides autocompletion,
+												so you can type the first few characters of a
+												property name and then select the one you want from
+												the drop-down list. </li>
+
+											<li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Value -</strong> the property value.</li>
+
+										</ul>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p">
+											<strong class="ph b">Files</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+										<p class="p">Files to pass to the job. Equivalent
+											to the Hadoop <samp class="ph codeph">-files</samp> option.  </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p">
+											<strong class="ph b">Archives</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+										<p class="p">Archives to pass to the job.
+											Equivalent to the Hadoop <samp class="ph codeph">-archives</samp>
+											option. </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+							</tbody>
+
+						</table>
 </div>
 
+				</div>
 
+				<div class="section" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_lvq_ch3_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_lvq_ch3_zj"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">MapReduce Job Design </h4>
+					
+					<div class="p">A MapReduce job design consists of MapReduce functions
+						written in Java. You can create a MapReduce job design from existing mapper
+						and reducer classes without having to write a main Java class. You must
+						specify the mapper and reducer classes as well as other MapReduce properties
+						in the Job Properties setting. 
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_zcz_5g3_zj"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_zcz_5g3_zj" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+								
+								
+								<tbody class="tbody">
+									<tr class="row">
+										<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+											<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Jar
+												path</strong>
+											</p>
 
-<p><a name="JobDesigner-CreatingaMapreducedesign"></a></p>
+										</td>
 
-<h2><a name="JobDesigner-CreatingaMapReduceJobDesign"></a>Creating a MapReduce Job Design</h2>
+										<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+											<p class="p">The fully-qualified path to a JAR
+												file containing the classes that implement the
+												Mapper and Reducer functions. </p>
 
-<p>A MapReduce job design consists of MapReduce functions written in Java. You can create a<font color="#000000">&nbsp;MapReduce&nbsp;job design from existing mapper and reducer classes without having to write a main Java class. You must specify the mapper and reducer classes as well as other MapReduce properties in the Job Properties setting.</font></p>
+										</td>
 
+									</tr>
 
-<p><b>To create a MapReduce job design:</b></p>
+								</tbody>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Designs</b> window, click <b>Create MapReduce Design</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Design (MapReduce type)</b> window, specify the common and job type specific information.
-<div class='table-wrap'>
-<table class='confluenceTable'><tbody>
-<tr>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> <b>Setting</b> </th>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> <b>Description</b> </th>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Jar path</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> The fully-qualified path to a JAR file containing the classes that implement the Mapper and Reducer functions. </td>
-</tr>
-</tbody></table>
+							</table>
 </div>
-</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Save</b> to save the job settings.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<p><a name="JobDesigner-CreatingaStreamingJobDesign"></a></p>
-
-<h2><a name="JobDesigner-CreatingaStreamingJobDesign"></a>Creating a Streaming Job Design</h2>
-
-<p>Hadoop streaming jobs enable you to create MapReduce functions in any non-Java language that reads standard Unix input and writes standard Unix output. For more information about Hadoop streaming jobs, see <a href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh/3/hadoop-0.20.2+320/streaming.html">Hadoop Streaming</a>.</p>
-
-<p><b>To create a streaming job design:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Designs</b> window, click <b>Create Streaming Design</b>.</li>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Design (streaming type)</b> window,&nbsp;specify the common and job type specific information.
-<div class='table-wrap'>
-<table class='confluenceTable'><tbody>
-<tr>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> Setting </th>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> Description </th>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Mapper</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> The path to the mapper script or class. If the mapper file is not on the machines on the cluster, use the <b>Files</b> option to pass it as a part of job submission. Equivalent to the Hadoop <tt>-mapper</tt> option. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Reducer</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> The path to the reducer script or class. If the reducer file is not on the machines on the cluster, use the <b>Files</b> option to pass it as a part of job submission. Equivalent to the Hadoop <tt>-reducer</tt> option. </td>
-</tr>
-</tbody></table>
 </div>
-</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Save</b> to save the job settings.</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-
-<p><a name="JobDesigner-CreatingaJavaJobDesign"></a></p>
-
-<h2><a name="JobDesigner-CreatingaJavaJobDesign"></a>Creating a Java Job Design</h2>
-
-<p>A Java job design consists of a main class written in Java.</p>
-
-<p><b>To create a Java job design:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Designs</b> window, click <b>Create Java Design</b>.</li>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Design (java type)</b> window, specify the common and job type specific information.
-<div class='table-wrap'>
-<table class='confluenceTable'><tbody>
-<tr>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> <b>Setting</b> </th>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> <b>Description</b> </th>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Jar path</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> The fully-qualified path to a JAR file containing the main class. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Main class</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> The main class to invoke the program. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Args</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> The arguments to pass to the main class. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Java opts</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> The options to pass to the JVM. </td>
-</tr>
-</tbody></table>
+
+				</div>
+
+				<div class="section" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_zrd_gh3_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_zrd_gh3_zj"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Streaming Job Design </h4>
+					
+					<p class="p">Hadoop streaming jobs enable you to create MapReduce
+						functions in any non-Java language that reads standard Unix input and writes
+						standard Unix output. For more information about Hadoop streaming jobs, see
+							<a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh/3/hadoop-0.20.2+320/streaming.html" target="_blank">Hadoop Streaming</a>. </p>
+
+					
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_jnj_vg3_zj"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_jnj_vg3_zj" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+							
+							
+							<tbody class="tbody">
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Mapper</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+										<p class="p">The path to the mapper script or
+											class. If the mapper file is not on the machines on the
+											cluster, use the <strong class="ph b">Files</strong>
+											option to pass it as a part of job submission.
+											Equivalent to the Hadoop <samp class="ph codeph">-mapper</samp>
+											option. </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Reducer</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+										<p class="p">The path to the reducer script or
+											class. If the reducer file is not on the machines on the
+											cluster, use the <strong class="ph b">Files</strong>
+											option to pass it as a part of job submission.
+											Equivalent to the Hadoop <samp class="ph codeph">-reducer</samp>
+											option. </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+							</tbody>
+
+						</table>
 </div>
-</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Save</b> to save the job settings.</li>
-</ol>
+
+				</div>
+
+				<div class="section" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_abl_hh3_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_abl_hh3_zj"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Java Job Design </h4>
+					
+					<p class="p">A Java job design consists of a main class written in
+						Java. </p>
+
+					
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_odm_wg3_zj"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_odm_wg3_zj" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+							
+							
+							<tbody class="tbody">
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Jar
+												path</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+										<p class="p">The fully-qualified path to a JAR
+											file containing the main class. </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Main
+												class</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+										<p class="p">The main class to invoke the program.
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Args</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+										<p class="p">The arguments to pass to the main
+											class. </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Java
+												opts</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+										<p class="p">The options to pass to the JVM. </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+							</tbody>
+
+						</table>
+</div>
+
+				</div>
+
+				<div class="section" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_tvm_3h3_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_tvm_3h3_zj"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Pig Job Design</h4>
+					
+					<p class="p">A Pig job design consists of a Pig script. </p>
+
+					
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_tck_4h3_zj"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_tck_4h3_zj" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+							
+							
+							<tbody class="tbody">
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Script
+												name</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">Script name or path to the Pig script.</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+							</tbody>
+
+						</table>
+</div>
+
+				</div>
+
+				<div class="section" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_lxq_3h3_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_lxq_3h3_zj"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Hive Job Design </h4>
+					
+					<p class="p">A Hive job design consists of a Hive script. </p>
+
+					
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_mzv_ph3_zj"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_mzv_ph3_zj" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+							
+							
+							<tbody class="tbody">
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Script
+												name</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">Script name or path to the Hive script. </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+							</tbody>
+
+						</table>
+</div>
+
+				</div>
+
+				<div class="section" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_xb5_3h3_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_xb5_3h3_zj"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Sqoop Job Design </h4>
+					
+					<p class="p">A Sqoop job design consists of a Sqoop command. </p>
+
+					
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_enb_qh3_zj"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_enb_qh3_zj" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+							
+							
+							<tbody class="tbody">
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Command</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">The Sqoop command.</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+							</tbody>
+
+						</table>
+</div>
+
+				</div>
+
+				<div class="section" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_xvw_3h3_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_xvw_3h3_zj"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Shell Job Design </h4>
+					
+					<p class="p">A Shell job design consists of a shell command. </p>
+
+					
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_mn2_qh3_zj"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_mn2_qh3_zj" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+							
+							
+							<tbody class="tbody">
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Command</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">The shell command.</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Capture
+												output</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">Indicate whether to capture the output
+											of the command.</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+							</tbody>
+
+						</table>
+</div>
+
+				</div>
+
+				<div class="section" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_tnz_3h3_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_tnz_3h3_zj"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Ssh Job Design </h4>
+					
+					<p class="p">A Ssh job design consists of an ssh command. </p>
+
+					
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_ysk_qh3_zj"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_ysk_qh3_zj" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+							
+							
+							<tbody class="tbody">
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">User</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">The name of the user to run the command as. </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Host</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">The name of the host to run the command on.</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Command</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">The ssh command.</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Capture
+												output</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">Indicate whether to capture the output of the command.</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+							</tbody>
+
+						</table>
+</div>
+
+				</div>
+
+				<div class="section" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_qsc_jh3_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_qsc_jh3_zj"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">DistCp Job Design </h4>
+					
+					<p class="p">A DistCp job design consists of a . </p>
+
+				</div>
+
+				<div class="section" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_hx4_lh3_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_hx4_lh3_zj"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Fs Job Design</h4>
+					
+					<p class="p">A Fs job design consists of a command that operates on HDFS. </p>
+
+					
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_szs_qh3_zj"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_szs_qh3_zj" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+							
+							
+							<tbody class="tbody">
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Delete
+												path</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="66.66666666666666%">
+										<p class="p">The path to delete.  If it is a directory, it deletes recursively
+											all its content and then deletes the directory.  </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Create
+												directory</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="66.66666666666666%">
+										<p class="p">The path of a directory to create. </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Move
+												file</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="66.66666666666666%">
+										<p class="p">The source and destination paths to the file to be moved.</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Change
+												permissions</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="66.66666666666666%">
+										<p class="p">The path whose permissions are to be changed, the permissions, and
+											an indicator of whether to change permission
+											recursively.</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+							</tbody>
+
+						</table>
+</div>
+
+				</div>
+
+				<div class="section" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_qjt_lh3_zj"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_qjt_lh3_zj"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Email Job Design </h4>
+					
+					<p class="p">A Email job design consists of an email message. </p>
+
+					
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_yyw_qh3_zj"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="concept_gt5_bh3_zj__table_yyw_qh3_zj" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+							
+							
+							<tbody class="tbody">
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">To
+												addresses</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">The recipient of the email message.
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">CC addresses (optional)</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">The cc recipients of the email
+											message. </p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Subject</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">The subject of the email message.</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+								<tr class="row">
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Body</strong>
+										</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+									<td class="entry" valign="top" width="50%">
+										<p class="p">The body of the email message.</p>
+
+									</td>
+
+								</tr>
+
+							</tbody>
+
+						</table>
+</div>
+
+				</div>
+
+			</div>
+
+		</div>
+
+
+		<div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_8_4_6"><a name="topic_8_4_6"><!-- --></a>
+
+			<h3 class="title topictitle3">Submitting a Job Design </h3>
+
+
+			<div class="body conbody">
+				<div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> 
+					<p class="p">A job's input files must be uploaded to the cluster before you can submit the
+						job.</p>
+
+				</div>
+
+
+				<p class="p">
+					<strong class="ph b">To submit a job design:</strong>
+				</p>
+
+
+				<ol class="ol">
+
+					<li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Designs</strong> window, click <strong class="ph b">Designs</strong> in the upper left
+						corner. Your jobs and other users' jobs are displayed in the <strong class="ph b">Job
+							Designs</strong> window.</li>
+
+
+					<li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the job you want to submit.</li>
+
+
+					<li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Submit</strong> button. <a name="topic_8_4_6__ol_apj_lnt_4j"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" type="a" id="topic_8_4_6__ol_apj_lnt_4j"> <li class="li">If the job
+								contains variables, enter the information requested in the dialog
+								box that appears. For example, the sample grep MapReduce design
+								displays a dialog where you specify the output directory.</li>
+
+								<li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Submit</strong> to submit the job.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+					</li>
+
+
+				</ol>
+
+
+				<p class="p" id="topic_8_4_6__p_87"><a name="topic_8_4_6__p_87"><!-- --></a> After the job is complete, the Job Designer displays the results of
+					the job. For information about displaying job results, see <a class="xref" href="#topic_8_5">Displaying the Results of Submitting a
+						Job</a>. </p>
+
+
+			</div>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+
+		<div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_8_4_7"><a name="topic_8_4_7"><!-- --></a>
+
+			<h3 class="title topictitle3">Copying, Editing, and Deleting a Job Design </h3>
+
+
+			<div class="body conbody">
+
+				<p class="p">If you want to edit and use a job but you don't own it, you can make a copy of
+					it and then edit and use the copied job. </p>
+
+				
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="topic_8_4_7__table_rxy_gdh_b3"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="topic_8_4_7__table_rxy_gdh_b3" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+						
+						
+						<thead class="thead" align="left">
+							<tr class="row">
+								<th class="entry" valign="top" width="20%" id="d11788e1268">Action</th>
+
+								<th class="entry" valign="top" width="80%" id="d11788e1271">Procedure</th>
+
+							</tr>
+
+						</thead>
+
+						<tbody class="tbody">
+							<tr class="row">
+								<td class="entry" valign="top" width="20%" headers="d11788e1268 ">
+									<p class="p">
+										<strong class="ph b">Copy</strong>
+									</p>
+
+								</td>
+
+								<td class="entry" valign="top" width="80%" headers="d11788e1271 ">
+									<div class="p">
+										<a name="topic_8_4_7__ol_vtf_hch_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_8_4_7__ol_vtf_hch_dk">
+											<li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Designs</strong> window,
+												click <strong class="ph b">Designs</strong>. The
+												jobs are displayed in the <strong class="ph b">Job Designs</strong>
+												window.</li>
+
+											<li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the
+												job you want to copy.</li>
+
+											<li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Copy</strong> button.</li>
+
+											<li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Design Editor</strong>
+												window, change the settings and then click <strong class="ph b">Save</strong> to save the
+												job settings.</li>
+
+										</ol>
+
+									</div>
+
+								</td>
+
+							</tr>
+
+							<tr class="row">
+								<td class="entry" valign="top" width="20%" headers="d11788e1268 ">
+									<p class="p">
+										<strong class="ph b">Edit</strong>
+									</p>
+
+								</td>
+
+								<td class="entry" valign="top" width="80%" headers="d11788e1271 ">
+									<div class="p">
+										<a name="topic_8_4_7__ol_xxr_hch_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_8_4_7__ol_xxr_hch_dk">
+											<li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Designs</strong> window,
+												click <strong class="ph b">Designs</strong>. The
+												jobs are displayed in the <strong class="ph b">Job Designs</strong>
+												window.</li>
+
+											<li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the
+												job you want to edit.</li>
+
+											<li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Edit</strong> button.</li>
+
+											<li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Design</strong> window,
+												change the settings and then click <strong class="ph b">Save</strong> to save the
+												job settings.</li>
+
+										</ol>
+
+									</div>
+
+								</td>
+
+							</tr>
+
+							<tr class="row">
+								<td class="entry" valign="top" width="20%" headers="d11788e1268 ">Delete</td>
+
+								<td class="entry" valign="top" width="80%" headers="d11788e1271 ">
+									<div class="p">
+										<a name="topic_8_4_7__ol_hjf_3ch_dk"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_8_4_7__ol_hjf_3ch_dk">
+											<li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Designs</strong> window,
+												click <strong class="ph b">Designs</strong>. The
+												jobs are displayed in the <strong class="ph b">Job Designs</strong>
+												window.</li>
+
+											<li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the
+												job you want to delete.</li>
+
+											<li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Delete</strong> button.</li>
+
+											<li class="li" id="topic_8_4_7__li_88"><a name="topic_8_4_7__li_88"><!-- --></a>Click <strong class="ph b">OK</strong> to confirm the
+												deletion.</li>
+
+										</ol>
+
+									</div>
+
+								</td>
+
+							</tr>
+
+						</tbody>
+
+					</table>
+</div>
+
+
+			</div>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+
+	</div>
+
+
+	<div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_8_5"><a name="topic_8_5"><!-- --></a>
+
+		<h2 class="title topictitle2">Displaying Results of Submitting a Job </h2>
+
+
+		<div class="body conbody">
+
+			<p class="p">
+				<strong class="ph b">To display the Job Submission History:</strong>
+			</p>
 
 
-<p><a name="JobDesigner-SubmittingaJobtoaCluster"></a></p>
+			<p class="p">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Designs</strong> window, click the <strong class="ph b">History</strong> tab. The jobs are
+				displayed in the <strong class="ph b">Job Submissions History</strong> listed by Oozie job ID. </p>
 
-<h2><a name="JobDesigner-SubmittingaJobDesign"></a>Submitting a Job Design</h2>
 
-<p><b>To submit a job design:</b></p>
+			<p class="p">
+				<strong class="ph b">To display Job Details:</strong>
+			</p>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Designs</b> window, click <b>Designs</b> in the upper left corner.<br/>
-Your jobs and other users' jobs are displayed in the <b>Job Designs</b> window.</li>
-	<li>Check the checkbox next to the job you want to submit.</li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Submit</b> button.
-	<ol>
-		<li>If the job contains variables, enter the information requested in the dialog box that appears.&nbsp;For example, the sample grep MapReduce design displays a dialog where you specify the output directory.</li>
-		<li>Click <b>Submit</b> to submit the job.</li>
-	</ol>
-	</li>
-</ol>
 
+			<p class="p">In the <strong class="ph b">Job Submission History</strong> window, click an Oozie Job ID. The results of
+				the job display: </p>
 
-<p>After the job is complete, the Job Designer displays the results of the job.&nbsp;For information about displaying job results, see <a href="#JobDesigner-DisplayingJobResults">Displaying Job Results</a>.</p>
 
-<p><a name="JobDesigner-Copying%2CEditing%2CandDeletingaJobDesign"></a></p>
+			<ul class="ul">
 
-<h2><a name="JobDesigner-Copying%2CEditing%2CandDeletingaJobDesign"></a>Copying, Editing, and Deleting a Job Design</h2>
+				<li class="li">Actions - a list of actions in the job.</li>
 
-<p>If you want to edit and use a job but you don't own it, you can make a copy of it and then edit and use the copied job.</p>
 
-<p><b>To copy a job design:</b></p>
+				<li class="li">Click <img class="image" src="/static/art/help/gear.png"/> to display the action configuration. In the action configuration for a
+					MapReduce action, click the value of the <samp class="ph codeph">mapred.output.dir</samp> property to display
+					the job output.</li>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Designs</b> window, click <b>Designs</b>.&nbsp;The jobs are displayed in the <b>Job Designs</b> window.</li>
-	<li>Check the checkbox next to the job you want to clone.</li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Clone</b> button.</li>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Design Editor</b> window, change the settings and then click <b>Save</b> to save the job settings.</li>
-</ol>
 
+				<li class="li">In the root-node row, click the Id in the External Id column to view the job in
+					the Job Browser.</li>
 
-<p><b>To edit a job design:</b></p>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Designs</b> window, click <b>Designs</b>.&nbsp;The jobs are displayed in the <b>Job Designs</b> window.</li>
-	<li>Check the checkbox next to the job you want to edit.</li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Edit</b> button.</li>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Design</b> window, change the settings and then click <b>Save</b> to save the job settings.</li>
-</ol>
+				<li class="li">Details - the job details. Click <img class="image" src="/static/art/help/gear.png"/> to display the Oozie application configuration.</li>
 
 
-<p><b>To delete a job design:</b></p>
+				<li class="li">Definition - the Oozie application definition.</li>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>Job Designs</b> window, click <b>Designs</b>.&nbsp;The jobs are displayed in the <b>Job Designs</b> window.</li>
-	<li>Check the checkbox next to the job you want to delete.</li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Delete</b> button.</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Ok</b> to confirm the deletion.</li>
-</ol>
 
+				<li class="li">Log - the output log.</li>
 
-<p><a name="JobDesigner-FilteringtheJobDesigns"></a></p>
 
-<h1><a name="JobDesigner-DisplayingResultsofSubmittingaJob"></a>Displaying Results of Submitting a Job</h1>
+			</ul>
 
-<p><b>To display the Job Submission History:</b></p>
 
-<p>In the <b>Job Designs</b> window, click the <b>History</b> tab.&nbsp;The jobs are displayed in the <b>Job Submissions History</b> listed by Oozie job ID.</p>
+		</div>
 
-<p><b>To display Job Details:</b></p>
 
-<p>In the <b>Job Submission History</b> window, click a Oozie Job ID. The results of the job display:</p>
+	</div>
 
-<ul>
-	<li>Actions - a list of actions in the job.
-	<ul>
-		<li>Click <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/jobsub/static/help/cog.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span>&nbsp;to display the action configuration. In the action configuration for a MapReduce action, click the value of the mapred.output.dir property to display the job output.</li>
-		<li>In the root-node row, click the Id in the External Id column to view the job in the Job Browser.</li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-	<li>Details - the job details. Click <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/jobsub/static/help/cog.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span> to display the Oozie application configuration.</li>
-	<li>Definition - the Oozie application definition.</li>
-	<li>Log - the output log.</li>
-</ul>
 
 
-				    					    <br/>
-                        </td>
-		    </tr>
-	    </table>
-	    
-    </body>
-</html>
+</body>
+</html>

+ 1311 - 374
apps/oozie/static/help/index.html

@@ -1,481 +1,1418 @@
-<h1><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-IntroducingOozieEditor%2FDashboard"></a>Introducing Oozie Editor/Dashboard</h1>
-
-<p>The Oozie Editor/Dashboard application allows you to define Oozie workflow and coordinator applications, run workflow and coordinator jobs, and view the status of jobs. For information about Oozie, see <a href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/oozie/">Oozie Documentation</a>.</p>
-
-<p>A workflow application is a collection of actions arranged in a directed acyclic graph (DAG). It includes control flow nodes (start, end, fork, join, decision, and kill) and action nodes (MapReduce, Streaming, Java, Pig, Hive, Sqoop, Shell, Ssh, DistCp, Fs, Email, Sub-workflow, and Generic).</p>
-
-<p>A coordinator application allows you to define and execute recurrent and interdependent workflow jobs. The coordinator application defines the conditions under which the execution of workflows can occur.</p>
-
-
-
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-Contents"></a>Contents</h2>
-
-<style type='text/css'>/*<![CDATA[*/
-div.rbtoc1360779583763 {margin-left: 1.5em;padding: 0px;}
-div.rbtoc1360779583763 ul {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 20px;}
-div.rbtoc1360779583763 li {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 0px;}
-
-/*]]>*/</style><div class='rbtoc1360779583763'>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-IntroducingOozieEditor%2FDashboard'>Introducing Oozie Editor/Dashboard</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-Oozie%26nbsp%3BEditor%2FDashboard%26nbsp%3BInstallationandConfiguration'>Oozie&nbsp;Editor/Dashboard&nbsp;Installation and Configuration</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-StartingOozie%26nbsp%3BEditor%2FDashboard'>Starting Oozie&nbsp;Editor/Dashboard</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-InstallingOozieEditor%2FDashboardSamples'>Installing Oozie Editor/Dashboard Samples</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-FilteringListsinOozieEditor%2FDashboard'>Filtering Lists in Oozie Editor/Dashboard</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-PermissionsinOozieEditor%2FDashboard'>Permissions in Oozie Editor/Dashboard</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-OozieDashboard'>Oozie Dashboard</a></li>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-Workflows'>Workflows</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-Coordinators'>Coordinators</a></li>
-</ul>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-WorkflowManager'>Workflow Manager</a></li>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-InstallingtheSampleWorkflows'>Installing the Sample Workflows</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-OpeningaWorkflow'>Opening a Workflow</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-CreatingaWorkflow'>Creating a Workflow</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-ImportingaWorkflow'>Importing a Workflow</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-SubmittingaWorkflow'>Submitting a Workflow</a></li>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-SuspendingaRunningJob'>Suspending a Running Job</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-ResumingaSuspendedJob'>Resuming a Suspended Job</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-RerunningaWorkflow'>Rerunning a Workflow</a></li>
-</ul>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-SchedulingaWorkflow'>Scheduling a Workflow</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaWorkflow'>Editing a Workflow</a></li>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-ActionNodes'>Action Nodes</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-ControlNodes'>Control Nodes</a></li>
-</ul>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-UploadingWorkflowFiles'>Uploading Workflow Files</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingWorkflowProperties'>Editing Workflow Properties</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-DisplayingtheHistoryofaWorkflow'>Displaying the History of a Workflow</a></li>
-</ul>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-CoordinatorManager'>Coordinator Manager</a></li>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-OpeningaCoordinator'>Opening a Coordinator</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-CreatingaCoordinator'>Creating a Coordinator</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-SubmittingaCoordinator'>Submitting a Coordinator</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaCoordinator'>Editing a Coordinator</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-CreatingaDataset'>Creating a Dataset</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-DisplayingDatasets'>Displaying Datasets</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaDataset'>Editing a Dataset</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#OozieEditorandDashboard-DisplayingtheHistoryofaCoordinator'>Displaying the History of a Coordinator</a></li>
-</ul>
-</ul></div>
-
-<h1><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-Oozie%26nbsp%3BEditor%2FDashboard%26nbsp%3BInstallationandConfiguration"></a>Oozie&nbsp;Editor/Dashboard&nbsp;Installation and Configuration</h1>
-
-<p>Oozie&nbsp;Editor/Dashboard is one of the applications that is installed as part of Hue. For information about installing and configuring Hue, see <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/CDH4DOC/Hue+Installation">Hue Installation</a>.</p>
-
-<div class='panelMacro'><table class='noteMacro'><colgroup><col width='24'><col></colgroup><tr><td valign='top'><img src="/static/art/help/warning.gif" width="16" height="16" align="absmiddle" alt="" border="0"></td><td><b>Note</b><br />In order to run DistCp, Streaming, Pig, Sqoop, and Hive jobs as part of a workflow, Oozie must be configured to use the Oozie ShareLib. See <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/CDH4DOC/Oozie+Installation">Oozie Installation</a>.</td></tr></table></div>
-
-<h1><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-StartingOozie%26nbsp%3BEditor%2FDashboard"></a>Starting Oozie&nbsp;Editor/Dashboard</h1>
-
-<p>To start Oozie Editor/Dashboard, click the <b>Oozie Editor/Dashboard</b> icon (<span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/jobsub/static/help/images/23888164.png" width="24" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue browser page. <b>Oozie Editor/Dashboard</b> opens with the following screens:</p>
-
-<ul>
-	<li>Dashboard - shows the running and completed workflow and coordinator jobs. The screen is selected and opened to the Workflows page.</li>
-	<li>Workflows - shows available workflows.</li>
-	<li>Coordinators - shows available coordinators.</li>
-	<li>History - shows a list of submitted jobs.</li>
-</ul>
-
-
-<h1><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-InstallingOozieEditor%2FDashboardSamples"></a>Installing Oozie Editor/Dashboard Samples</h1>
-
-<p>The Oozie Editor/Dashboard&nbsp;sample workflows and coordinators can help you learn how to use Oozie Editor/Dashboard. To install the samples:</p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>Click the <b>Workflows</b>&nbsp;tab.</li>
-	<li>Click the&nbsp;<b>Setup App</b>&nbsp;button. This action adds samples demonstrating all the types of actions to the Workflows Editor and one sample to the Coordinator Editor. It also creates workspaces and deployment directories required by the samples in /user/hue/oozie.</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<h1><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-FilteringListsinOozieEditor%2FDashboard"></a>Filtering Lists in Oozie Editor/Dashboard</h1>
-
-<p>The Dashboard, Workflows, Coordinators, and History screens contain lists of workflows, coordinators, and jobs. When you type in the Filter field on these screens, the lists are dynamically filtered to display only those rows containing text that matches the specified substring.</p>
-
-<h1><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-PermissionsinOozieEditor%2FDashboard"></a>Permissions in Oozie Editor/Dashboard</h1>
-
-<p>In the Dashboard workflows and coordinators can only be viewed, submitted, and modified by its owner or a superuser.</p>
-
-<p>Editor permissions for performing actions on workflows and coordinators are summarized in the following table:</p>
-
-<style type="text/css">
-td.confluenceTd {
-border: #dddddd solid 1px;
-height: 36px;
-padding: 5px 10px;
-vertical-align: top;
-}
-th.confluenceTh {
-border: #dddddd solid 1px;
-height: 40px;
-padding: 5px 10px;
-vertical-align: center;
-}
-</style>
-
-<div class='table-wrap'>
-<table class='confluenceTable'><tbody>
-<tr>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> Action </th>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> Superuser or Owner <br class="atl-forced-newline" /> </th>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> All </th>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> View </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Y </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Only if "Is shared" is set <br class="atl-forced-newline" /> </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Submit </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Y </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Only if "Is shared" is set <br class="atl-forced-newline" /> </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Modify </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Y </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> N </td>
-</tr>
-</tbody></table>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE html
+  PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html lang="en-us" xml:lang="en-us">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"/>
+<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="commonltr.css"/>
+<title>Oozie Editor and Dashboard</title>
+</head>
+<body id="topic_9"><a name="topic_9"><!-- --></a>
+
+
+
+  <h1 class="title topictitle1">Oozie Editor and Dashboard </h1>
+
+
+  <div class="body conbody">
+
+    <p class="p">The Oozie Editor/Dashboard application allows you to define Oozie
+      workflow, coordinator, and bundle applications, run workflow, coordinator, and bundle jobs,
+      and view the status of jobs. For information about Oozie, see <a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/oozie/" target="_blank">Oozie Documentation</a>. </p>
+
+
+    <div class="p">A <dfn class="term">workflow application</dfn> is a collection of actions arranged in
+      a directed acyclic graph (DAG). It includes two types of nodes:<a name="topic_9__ul_fyv_mnr_2k"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="topic_9__ul_fyv_mnr_2k">
+        <li class="li">Control flow - start, end, fork, join, decision, and kill</li>
+
+        <li class="li">Action - <a class="xref" href="jobsub#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_lvq_ch3_zj">MapReduce</a>, <a class="xref" href="jobsub#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_zrd_gh3_zj">Streaming</a>, <a class="xref" href="jobsub#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_abl_hh3_zj">Java</a>, <a class="xref" href="jobsub#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_tvm_3h3_zj">Pig</a>, <a class="xref" href="jobsub#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_lxq_3h3_zj">Hive</a>, <a class="xref" href="jobsub#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_xb5_3h3_zj">Sqoop</a>, <a class="xref" href="jobsub#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_xvw_3h3_zj">Shell</a>, <a class="xref" href="jobsub#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_tnz_3h3_zj">Ssh</a>, <a class="xref" href="jobsub#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_qsc_jh3_zj">DistCp</a>, <a class="xref" href="jobsub#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_hx4_lh3_zj">Fs</a>, and <a class="xref" href="jobsub#concept_gt5_bh3_zj__section_qjt_lh3_zj">Email</a>) <p class="p">In order to run DistCp, Streaming, Pig, Sqoop, and Hive
+      jobs, Oozie must be configured to use the Oozie ShareLib. See Oozie Installation in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html</a>. </p>
+</li>
+
+      </ul>
+</div>
+
+
+    <p class="p">A <dfn class="term">coordinator application</dfn> allows you to define and execute
+      recurrent and interdependent workflow jobs. The coordinator application defines the conditions
+      under which the execution of workflows can occur. </p>
+
+    <p class="p">A <dfn class="term">bundle application</dfn> allows you to batch a set of
+      coordinator applications. </p>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_1"><a name="topic_9_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Oozie Editor/Dashboard Installation and
+      Configuration </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">Oozie Editor/Dashboard is one of the applications installed as part of
+        Hue. <span class="ph">For information about installing and configuring Hue,
+        see Hue Installation in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html</a>.</span></p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_2"><a name="topic_9_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Starting Oozie Editor/Dashboard </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">Click the <strong class="ph b">Oozie Editor/Dashboard</strong> icon
+          (<img class="image" src="/static/art/help/icon_oozie_24.png"/>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue browser page. <strong class="ph b">Oozie Editor/Dashboard</strong> opens with the following screens: </p>
+
+
+      <ul class="ul">
+        <li class="li"><a class="xref" href="#topic_9_6">Dashboard</a> - shows
+          the running and completed workflow, coordinator, and bundle jobs and information about
+          Oozie instrumentation and configuration. The screen is selected and opened to the
+          Workflows page.</li>
+
+        <li class="li"><a class="xref" href="#topic_9_7">Workflow Manager</a> - shows
+          available workflows and allows you to create and import workflows.</li>
+
+        <li class="li"><a class="xref" href="#topic_9_8">Coordinator Manager</a> - shows
+          available coordinators and allows you to create coordinators.</li>
+
+        <li class="li"><a class="xref" href="#concept_crd_ttp_wj">Bundle Manager</a> - shows available bundles and allows you to create bundles.</li>
+
+      </ul>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_3"><a name="topic_9_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Installing Oozie Editor/Dashboard
+      Examples </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> You must be a superuser to perform this task.</div>
+
+
+      <a name="topic_9_3__ol_ugf_hjt_yj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_9_3__ol_ugf_hjt_yj">
+        <li class="li">Click <a name="topic_9_3__d104e102"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_9_3__d104e102" src="/static/art/help/quick_start.png"/>. The Quick Start Wizard opens.</li>
+<li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Step 2:
+            Examples</strong>.</li>
+
+        <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Oozie Editor/Dashboard</strong>.</li>
+
+      </ol>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_4"><a name="topic_9_4"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Filtering Lists in Oozie Editor/Dashboard </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">Many screens contain lists. When you type in the Filter field on
+        screens, the lists are dynamically filtered to display only those rows containing text that
+        matches the specified substring. </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_5"><a name="topic_9_5"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Permissions in Oozie Editor/Dashboard
+    </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">In the Dashboard workflows, coordinators, and bundles can only be
+        viewed, submitted, and modified by their owner or a superuser. </p>
+
+
+      <p class="p">Editor permissions for performing actions on workflows, coordinators,
+        and bundles are summarized in the following table: </p>
+
+
+      
+<div class="tablenoborder"><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+          
+          
+          
+          <thead class="thead" align="left">
+            <tr class="row">
+              <th class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%" id="d15249e233">
+        <p class="p">       <strong class="ph b">Action</strong>
+                </p>
+
+              </th>
+
+              <th class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%" id="d15249e242">
+        <p class="p">       <strong class="ph b">Superuser or Owner</strong>
+                </p>
+
+              </th>
+
+              <th class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%" id="d15249e251">
+        <p class="p">       <strong class="ph b">All</strong>
+                </p>
+
+              </th>
+
+            </tr>
+
+          </thead>
+
+          <tbody class="tbody">
+            <tr class="row">
+              <td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%" headers="d15249e233 ">
+                <p class="p">View </p>
+
+              </td>
+
+              <td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%" headers="d15249e242 ">
+                <p class="p">Y </p>
+
+              </td>
+
+              <td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%" headers="d15249e251 ">
+                <p class="p">Only if "Is shared" is set </p>
+
+              </td>
+
+            </tr>
+
+            <tr class="row">
+              <td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%" headers="d15249e233 ">
+                <p class="p">Submit </p>
+
+              </td>
+
+              <td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%" headers="d15249e242 ">
+                <p class="p">Y </p>
+
+              </td>
+
+              <td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%" headers="d15249e251 ">
+                <p class="p">Only if "Is shared" is set </p>
+
+              </td>
+
+            </tr>
+
+            <tr class="row">
+              <td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%" headers="d15249e233 ">
+                <p class="p">Modify </p>
+
+              </td>
+
+              <td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%" headers="d15249e242 ">
+                <p class="p">Y </p>
+
+              </td>
+
+              <td class="entry" valign="top" width="33.33333333333333%" headers="d15249e251 ">
+                <p class="p">N </p>
+
+              </td>
+
+            </tr>
+
+          </tbody>
+
+        </table>
 </div>
 
 
-<h1><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-OozieDashboard"></a>Oozie Dashboard</h1>
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" id="concept_ms2_rzj_2k"><a name="concept_ms2_rzj_2k"><!-- --></a>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Deleting and Restoring Workflows, Coordinators, and Bundles</h2>
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <p class="p">You can move workflows, coordinators, and bundles to the trash and later restore or
+        permanently delete them.</p>
+
+      <div class="section" id="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__section_bvz_wzj_2k"><a name="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__section_bvz_wzj_2k"><!-- --></a><h3 class="title sectiontitle">Deleting Workflows, Coordinators, and Bundles</h3>
+        
+        <a name="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__ol_wkz_yzj_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__ol_wkz_yzj_2k">
+          <li class="li">In a Manager screen, check the checkbox next to one or more workflows, coordinators or
+            bundles.</li>
+
+          <li class="li" id="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__li_dty_3gr_2k"><a name="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__li_dty_3gr_2k"><!-- --></a>Choose one of the following:<ul class="ul">
+              <li class="li"><span class="ph menucascade"><span class="ph uicontrol">Delete</span> &gt; <span class="ph uicontrol">Move to trash</span></span></li>
+
+              <li class="li"><span class="ph menucascade"><span class="ph uicontrol">Delete</span> &gt; <span class="ph uicontrol">Delete forever</span></span></li>
+
+            </ul>
+</li>
+
+        </ol>
+
+      </div>
+
+      <div class="section" id="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__section_ecf_xzj_2k"><a name="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__section_ecf_xzj_2k"><!-- --></a><h3 class="title sectiontitle">Restoring Workflows, Coordinators, and Bundles</h3>
+        
+        <a name="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__ol_ujf_dbk_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__ol_ujf_dbk_2k">
+          <li class="li" id="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__li_msc_mgr_2k"><a name="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__li_msc_mgr_2k"><!-- --></a>In a Manager screen, click <a name="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__image_e35_2bk_2k"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__image_e35_2bk_2k" src="/static/art/help/trash.png"/>
+            <strong class="ph b">Trash</strong>.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Check the checkbox next to one or more workflows, coordinators or bundles.</li>
+
+          <li class="li" id="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__li_ndg_mgr_2k"><a name="concept_ms2_rzj_2k__li_ndg_mgr_2k"><!-- --></a>Click <span class="ph uicontrol">Restore</span>.</li>
+
+        </ol>
+
+      </div>
+
+    </div>
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_6"><a name="topic_9_6"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Dashboard </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">The Dashboard shows a summary of the running and completed workflow,
+        coordinator, and bundle jobs. </p>
+
+
+      <p class="p">
+        You can view jobs for a period up to the last 30 days.
+      </p>
+
+
+      <p class="p">
+        You can filter the list by date (1, 7, 15, or 30 days) or status (Succeeded, Running, or Killed). The date and
+        status buttons are toggles.
+      </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_6_1"><a name="topic_9_6_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Workflows</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+<p class="p">Click the <strong class="ph b">Workflows</strong> tab to view the running and completed workflow jobs for the filters you have
+          specified.
+        </p>
+
+
+<p class="p">Click a workflow row in the Running or Completed table to view detailed information about that workflow job.
+        </p>
+
+        <p class="p">In the left pane contains a link to the workflow and the variable values specified.<br/><a name="topic_9_6_1__image_xq2_stz_2k"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_9_6_1__image_xq2_stz_2k" src="/static/art/help/workflow.jpg"/><br/>
+        </p>
+
+
+<p class="p">For the selected job, the following information is available in the right
+          area. </p>
+
+
+        <ul class="ul">
+
+          <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Graph</strong> tab shows the workflow
+            DAG.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">
+            <strong class="ph b">Actions</strong> tab shows you details about the actions that
+            make up the workflow.<a name="topic_9_6_1__ul_pgz_3nt_4j"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="topic_9_6_1__ul_pgz_3nt_4j">
+              <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Id</strong> link to see
+                additional details about the action.</li>
+
+              <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">External Id</strong> link
+                to view the job in the Job Browser.</li>
+
+            </ul>
+
+          </li>
+
+
+          <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Details</strong> tab shows job statistics
+            including start and end times.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Configuration</strong> tab shows selected
+            job configuration settings.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Logs</strong> tab shows log output
+            generated by the workflow job.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Definition</strong> tab shows the Oozie
+            workflow definition, as it appears in the <samp class="ph codeph">workflow.xml</samp> file (also linked under the application path properties in the
+              <strong class="ph b">Details</strong> tab and the <strong class="ph b">Configuration</strong> tab).</li>
+
+
+        </ul>
+
+        <p class="p">For each action in the workflow you can:</p>
+
+        <a name="topic_9_6_1__ul_v4y_htz_2k"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="topic_9_6_1__ul_v4y_htz_2k">
+          <li class="li">
+            <div class="p">Click the <a name="topic_9_6_1__image_u3d_ssz_2k"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_9_6_1__image_u3d_ssz_2k" src="/static/art/help/eye.png"/> icon to view the
+              action screen, which contains:<a name="topic_9_6_1__ul_edm_5sz_2k"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="topic_9_6_1__ul_edm_5sz_2k">
+                <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Details</strong> tab shows job statistics including start and end times.</li>
+
+                <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Configuration</strong> tab shows the action configuration settings.</li>
+
+                <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Child Jobs</strong> tab lists jobs generated by the action.</li>
+
+              </ul>
+
+            </div>
+
+          </li>
+
+          <li class="li">
+            <p class="p">Click the <a name="topic_9_6_1__image_hwj_ktz_2k"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_9_6_1__image_hwj_ktz_2k" src="/static/art/help/log.png"/> icon to view the log
+              in the Job Browser. </p>
+
+          </li>
+
+        </ul>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_6_2"><a name="topic_9_6_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Coordinators</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+<p class="p">Click the <strong class="ph b">Coordinators</strong> tab to view the running and completed coordinator jobs for the filters you have
+          specified.
+        </p>
+
+
+<p class="p">For the selected job, the following information is available.
+        </p>
+
+
+        <ul class="ul">
+
+          <li class="li">The <strong class="ph b">Calendar</strong> tab shows the timestamp of the job. Click the timestamp
+						to open the workflow DAG. </li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">The <strong class="ph b">Actions</strong> tab shows you details about the actions that make up the coordinator.<a name="topic_9_6_2__ul_nld_3nt_4j"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="topic_9_6_2__ul_nld_3nt_4j">
+
+              <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Id</strong> link to see additional details about the
+								action.</li>
+
+
+              <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">External Id</strong> link to view the job in the Job
+								Browser.</li>
+
+
+            </ul>
+
+          </li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">The <strong class="ph b">Configuration</strong> tab shows selected job configuration settings.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">The <strong class="ph b">Logs</strong> tab shows log output generated by the coordinator.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">The <strong class="ph b">Definition</strong> tab shows the Oozie coordinator definition, as it
+						appears in the <samp class="ph codeph">coordinator.xml</samp> file (also linked under the
+						<samp class="ph codeph">oozie.coord.application.path</samp> property in the
+						 <strong class="ph b">Configuration</strong> tab).</li>
+
+
+        </ul>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_h1s_rtp_wj"><a name="concept_h1s_rtp_wj"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Bundles</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <p class="p">Click the <strong class="ph b">Bundles</strong> tab to view the
+          running and completed bundle jobs for the filters you have specified. </p>
+
+      </div>
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_hvm_5vd_2k"><a name="concept_hvm_5vd_2k"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Oozie</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <p class="p">The Oozie tab provides subtabs that give you access to Oozie instrumentation and
+          configuration settings.</p>
+
+        <div class="section" id="concept_hvm_5vd_2k__section_rbd_fwd_2k"><a name="concept_hvm_5vd_2k__section_rbd_fwd_2k"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Instrumentation</h4>
+          
+          <p class="p">For information on the instrumentation metrics supported by Oozie, see <a class="xref" href="http://oozie.apache.org/docs/3.3.0/AG_Monitoring.html" target="_blank">Oozie Monitoring</a>.</p>
+
+        </div>
+
+        <div class="section" id="concept_hvm_5vd_2k__section_zlh_cwd_2k"><a name="concept_hvm_5vd_2k__section_zlh_cwd_2k"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Configuration</h4>
+          
+          <p class="p">For information on the configuration properties supported by Oozie, see <a class="xref" href="http://oozie.apache.org/docs/3.3.0/AG_Install.html#Oozie_Configuration" target="_blank">Oozie Configuration</a>.</p>
+
+        </div>
+
+      </div>
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_7"><a name="topic_9_7"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Workflow Manager
+    </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">In Workflow Manager you create Oozie workflows and submit them for
+        execution. </p>
+
+
+      <p class="p">
+        Click the <strong class="ph b">Workflows</strong> tab to open the Workflow Manager.
+      </p>
+
+
+      <p class="p">
+        Each row shows a workflow: its name, description, timestamp of its last modification. It also shows:
+      </p>
+
+
+      <ul class="ul">
+
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Steps</strong> - the number of steps in the
+          workflow execution path. This is the number of execution steps between the start and end
+          of the workflow. This will not necessarily be the same as the number of actions in the
+          workflow, if there are control flow nodes in the control path.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Status</strong> - who can run the
+            workflow. <strong class="ph b">shared</strong> means users other than the owner can
+          access the workflow. <strong class="ph b">personal</strong> means only the owner can
+          modify or submit the workflow. The default is personal.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Owner</strong> - the user that created the
+          workflow.</li>
+
+
+      </ul>
+
+
+      <p class="p">
+        In Workflow Editor you edit workflows that include MapReduce, Streaming, Java, Pig, Hive, Sqoop, Shell, Ssh,
+        DistCp, Fs, Email, Sub-workflow, and Generic actions. You can configure these actions in the Workflow Editor, or
+        you can import job designs from Job Designer to be used as actions in your workflow. For information about
+        defining workflows, see the
+        <a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/oozie/WorkflowFunctionalSpec.html" target="_blank">Workflow
+        Specification</a>.
+      </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_7_2"><a name="topic_9_7_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Opening a Workflow</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+<p class="p">To open a workflow, in Workflow Manager, click the workflow. Proceed
+          with <a class="xref" href="#topic_9_7_7">Editing a Workflow</a>.
+        </p>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_7_3"><a name="topic_9_7_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Creating a Workflow</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Create</strong> button at the top right.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">In the Name field, type a name.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Check the <span class="ph uicontrol">Is shared</span> checkbox to allow all users to access the
+            workflow.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">advanced</strong> to specify the
+            deployment directory or a job.xml file.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Save</strong>. The Workflow Editor opens. Proceed with <a class="xref" href="#topic_9_7_7">Editing a Workflow</a>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_7_4"><a name="topic_9_7_4"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Importing a Workflow</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Import</strong> button at the top right.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">In the Name field, type a name.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Local workflow.xml file</strong> field, click <strong class="ph b">Choose File</strong> and
+						select a workflow file.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">advanced</strong> to specify whether the workflow is shared, the
+						deployment directory, or a job.xml file.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Save</strong>. The Workflow Editor opens. Proceed with <a class="xref" href="#topic_9_7_7">Editing a Workflow</a>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_7_5"><a name="topic_9_7_5"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Submitting a Workflow</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+<p class="p">To submit a workflow for execution, do one of the following:
+        </p>
+
+
+        <ul class="ul">
+
+          <li class="li">In the Workflow Manager, click the radio button next to the workflow, and
+						click the <strong class="ph b">Submit</strong> button.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">In the Workflow Editor, click the <strong class="ph b">Submit</strong> button.</li>
+
+
+        </ul>
+
+
+<p class="p">The workflow job is submitted and the Dashboard displays the workflow job.
+        </p>
+
+
+<p class="p">To view the output of the job, click
+
+          <img class="image" src="/static/art/help/log.png"/>
+
+          <strong class="ph b">View the logs</strong>.
+        </p>
+
+
+        <div class="section"><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Suspending a Running Job</h4>
+
+          
+
+  <p class="p"> In the pane on the left, click the <strong class="ph b">Suspend</strong> button.
+          </p>
+
+
+          <ol class="ol">
+
+            <li class="li">Verify that you want to suspend the job.</li>
+
+
+          </ol>
+
+
+        </div>
+
+
+        <div class="section"><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Resuming a Suspended Job</h4>
+
+          
+
+  <p class="p"> In the pane on the left, click the <strong class="ph b">Resume</strong> button.
+          </p>
+
+
+          <ol class="ol">
+
+            <li class="li">Verify that you want to resume the job.</li>
+
+
+          </ol>
+
+
+        </div>
+
+
+        <div class="section"><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Rerunning a Workflow</h4>
+
+          
+
+  <p class="p"> In the pane on the left, click the <strong class="ph b">Rerun</strong> button.
+          </p>
+
+
+          <ol class="ol">
+
+            <li class="li">Check the checkboxes next to the actions to rerun.</li>
+
+
+            <li class="li">Specify required variables.</li>
+
+
+            <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Submit</strong>.</li>
+
+
+          </ol>
+
+
+        </div>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_7_6"><a name="topic_9_7_6"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Scheduling a Workflow</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+<p class="p">To schedule a workflow for recurring execution, do one of the following:
+        </p>
+
+
+        <ul class="ul">
+
+          <li class="li">In the Workflow Manager, check the checkbox next to the workflow
+            and click the <strong class="ph b">Schedule</strong> button.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">In the Workflow Editor, click the <strong class="ph b">Schedule</strong> button.</li>
+
+
+        </ul>
+
+
+        <p class="p" id="topic_9_7_6__p_102"><a name="topic_9_7_6__p_102"><!-- --></a>
+          A coordinator is created and opened in the Coordinator Editor. Proceed
+          with <a class="xref" href="#topic_9_8_4">Editing a Coordinator</a>.
+        </p>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_7_7"><a name="topic_9_7_7"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Editing a Workflow</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+<p class="p">In the Workflow Editor you can easily perform operations on Oozie action and control nodes.
+        </p>
+
+
+        <div class="section"><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Action Nodes</h4>
+
+          
+
+  <p class="p"> The Workflow Editor supports dragging and dropping action nodes. As you move the action over other actions
+            and forks, highlights indicate active areas. If there are actions in the workflow, the active areas are the
+            actions themselves and the areas above and below the actions. If you drop an action on an existing action, a
+            fork and join is added to the workflow.
+          </p>
+
+
+          <ul class="ul">
+
+            <li class="li">Add actions to the workflow by clicking an action <a name="topic_9_7_7__image_kpj_dnt_4j"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_9_7_7__image_kpj_dnt_4j" src="/static/art/help/action.png"/> button and drop the action on the workflow. The Edit Node
+              screen displays. <a name="topic_9_7_7__ol_l3q_dnt_4j"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_9_7_7__ol_l3q_dnt_4j">
+                <li class="li">Set the action properties and click <strong class="ph b">Done</strong>. Each action in a workflow must have a
+                  unique name.</li>
+
+              </ol>
+</li>
+
+
+          </ul>
+
+
+          <ul class="ul">
+
+            <li class="li">Copy an action by clicking the <img class="image" src="/static/art/help/copy.png"/>
+              <strong class="ph b">Copy</strong> button.</li>
+
+
+          </ul>
+
+
+          <a name="topic_9_7_7__ol_bjq_r55_yj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_9_7_7__ol_bjq_r55_yj">
+            <li class="li">The action is opened in the Edit Node screen.</li>
+
+            <li class="li">Edit the action properties and click <strong class="ph b">Done</strong>. The action is added to the end of the
+              workflow.</li>
+
+          </ol>
+
+
+          <ul class="ul">
+
+            <li class="li">Delete an action by clicking the <img class="image" src="/static/art/help/trash.png"/> button.</li>
+
+
+            <li class="li">Edit an action by clicking the <img class="image" src="/static/art/help/edit.png"/> button.</li>
+
+
+            <li class="li">Change the position of an action by left-clicking and dragging an action
+							to a new location.</li>
+
+
+          </ul>
+
+
+        </div>
+
+
+        <div class="section"><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Control Nodes</h4>
+
+          
+
+          <ul class="ul">
+
+            <li class="li">Create a fork and join by dropping an action on top of another
+							action.</li>
+
+
+            <li class="li">Remove a fork and join by dragging a forked action and dropping it above
+							the fork.</li>
+
+
+            <li class="li">Convert a fork to a decision by clicking the <img class="image" src="/static/art/help/convert.png"/>
+							button.</li>
+
+
+            <li class="li">To edit a decision: <a name="topic_9_7_7__ol_dcc_fnt_4j"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="topic_9_7_7__ol_dcc_fnt_4j">
+                <li class="li">Click the <a name="topic_9_7_7__image_lcc_fnt_4j"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_9_7_7__image_lcc_fnt_4j" src="/static/art/help/edit.png"/> button.</li>
+
+                <li class="li">Fill in the predicates that determine which action to
+                  perform and select the default action from the drop-down list.</li>
+
+                <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Done</strong>.</li>
+
+              </ol>
+</li>
+
+
+          </ul>
+
+
+        </div>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_7_8"><a name="topic_9_7_8"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Uploading Workflow Files</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+<p class="p">In the Workflow Editor, click the <strong class="ph b">Upload</strong>
+          button. </p>
+
+        <p class="p">The workspace of the workflow is opened in the File Browser
+          application. Follow the procedure in <a class="xref" href="filebrowser.html#topic_6_3_4">Uploading Files</a> to upload the files. You must put JAR files in a
+            <span class="ph filepath">lib</span> directory in the
+          workspace.</p>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_7_9"><a name="topic_9_7_9"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Editing Workflow Properties</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">In the Workflow Editor, click the link under the Name or Description fields
+						in the left pane.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">To share the workflow with all users, check the <strong class="ph b">Is shared</strong> checkbox.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">To set advanced execution options, click <strong class="ph b">advanced</strong> and edit the
+						deployment directory, add parameters and job properties, or specify a
+						job.xml file.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Save</strong>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_7_10"><a name="topic_9_7_10"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Displaying the History of a Workflow</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+          <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Dashboard</strong> tab.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Workflows</strong> tab. </li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click a workflow.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Actions</strong> tab.</li>
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_8"><a name="topic_9_8"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Coordinator Manager
+    </h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">
+        In Coordinator Manager you create Oozie coordinator applications and submit them for execution.
+      </p>
+
+
+      <p class="p">
+        Click the <strong class="ph b">Coordinators</strong> tab to open the Coordinator Manager.
+      </p>
+
+
+      <p class="p">
+        Each row shows a coordinator: its name, description, timestamp of its last modification. It also shows:
+      </p>
+
+
+      <ul class="ul">
+
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Workflow</strong> - the workflow that will
+          be run by the coordinator.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Frequency</strong> - how often the workflow
+          referenced by the coordinator will be run.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Status</strong> - who can run the
+          coordinator. <strong class="ph b">shared</strong> means users other than the owner can
+          access the workflow. <strong class="ph b">personal</strong> means only the owner can
+          modify or submit the workflow. The default is personal.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Owner</strong> - the user that created the
+          coordinator.</li>
+
+
+      </ul>
+
+
+      <p class="p">
+        In Coordinator Editor, you edit coordinators and the datasets required by the coordinators. For information
+        about defining coordinators and datasets, see the
+        <a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/oozie/CoordinatorFunctionalSpec.html" target="_blank">Coordinator
+        Specification</a>.
+      </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_8_1"><a name="topic_9_8_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Opening a Coordinator</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+<p class="p">To open a coordinator, in Coordinator Manager, click the coordinator. Proceed with
+          <a class="xref" href="#topic_9_8_4">Editing a Coordinator</a>.
+        </p>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_8_2"><a name="topic_9_8_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Creating a Coordinator</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+<p class="p">To create a coordinator, in Coordinator Manager:
+        </p>
+
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Create</strong> button at the top right. The Coordinator wizard
+						opens. Proceed with <a class="xref" href="#topic_9_8_4">Editing a
+							Coordinator</a>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_8_3"><a name="topic_9_8_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Submitting a Coordinator</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p" id="topic_9_8_3__p_110"><a name="topic_9_8_3__p_110"><!-- --></a> To submit a coordinator for execution, check the checkbox
+          next to the coordinator and click the <strong class="ph b">Submit</strong> button. </p>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_8_4"><a name="topic_9_8_4"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Editing a Coordinator</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+<p class="p">In the Coordinator Editor you specify coordinator properties and the datasets
+          on which the workflow scheduled by the coordinator will operate by stepping through
+          screens in a wizard. <span class="ph" id="topic_9_8_4__wizard"><a name="topic_9_8_4__wizard"><!-- --></a>You can also advance to particular steps and revisit
+            steps by clicking the Step "tabs" above the screens. The following instructions walk you
+            through the wizard. </span></p>
+
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">Type a name, select the workflow, check the <strong class="ph b">Is shared
+              checkbox</strong> to share the job, and click <strong class="ph b">Next</strong>. If
+            the Coordinator Editor was opened after scheduling a workflow, the workflow will be
+            set.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Select how many times the coordinator will run for each specified
+            unit, the start and end times of the coordinator, the timezone of the start and end
+            times, and click <strong class="ph b">Next</strong>. <span class="ph">Times must be expressed as
+              UTC times. For example, to run at 10 pm PST, specify a start time of 6 am UTC of the
+              following day (+8 hours) and set the Timezone field to America/Los_Angeles.</span></li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add</strong> to select an input dataset and click <strong class="ph b">Next</strong>. If no
+						datasets exist, follow the procedure in <a class="xref" href="#topic_9_8_5">Creating a Dataset</a>.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add</strong> to select an output dataset. Click <strong class="ph b">Save coordinator</strong>
+						or click <strong class="ph b">Next</strong> to specify advanced settings.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">To share the coordinator with all users, check the <strong class="ph b">Is</strong><strong class="ph b"> shared</strong>
+						checkbox.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Fill in parameters to pass to Oozie, properties that determine how long a
+						coordinator will wait before timing out, how many coordinators can run and
+						wait concurrently, and the coordinator execution policy.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li" id="topic_9_8_4__li_120"><a name="topic_9_8_4__li_120"><!-- --></a>Click <strong class="ph b">Save coordinator</strong>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_8_5"><a name="topic_9_8_5"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Creating a Dataset</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">In the Coordinator Editor, do one of the following: <a name="topic_9_8_5__ul_ynh_gnt_4j"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="topic_9_8_5__ul_ynh_gnt_4j">
+              <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">here</strong> in the Inputs or
+                Outputs pane at the top of the editor.</li>
+
+              <li class="li">In the pane at the left, click the <strong class="ph b">Create new</strong> link. Proceed with <a class="xref" href="#topic_9_8_7">Editing a
+                Dataset</a>.</li>
+
+            </ul>
+</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
 
-<p>Oozie&nbsp;Dashboard shows a summary of the running and completed workflow and coordinator jobs.</p>
 
-<p>You can view jobs for a period up to the last 30 days.</p>
+    </div>
 
-<p>You can filter the list by date (1, 7, 15, or 30 days) or status (Succeeded, Running, or Killed). The date and status buttons are toggles.</p>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-Workflows"></a>Workflows</h2>
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_8_6"><a name="topic_9_8_6"><!-- --></a>
 
-<p>Click the <b>Workflows</b> tab to view the running and completed workflow jobs for the filters you have specified.</p>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Displaying Datasets</h3>
 
-<p>Click a workflow row in the Running or Completed table to view detailed information about that workflow job.</p>
+      <div class="body conbody">
 
-<p>For the selected job, the following information is available.</p>
+        <ol class="ol">
 
-<ul>
-	<li>The <b>Graph</b>&nbsp;tab shows the workflow DAG.</li>
-	<li>The <b>Actions</b> tab shows you details about the actions that make up the workflow.
-	<ul>
-		<li>Click the <b>Id</b>&nbsp;link to see additional details about the action.</li>
-		<li>Click the&nbsp;<b>External Id</b>&nbsp;link to view the job in the Job Browser.</li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-	<li>The <b>Details</b> tab shows job statistics including start and end times, and provides a link to the workflow definition in the File Browser.</li>
-	<li>The <b>Configuration</b> tab shows selected job configuration settings.</li>
-	<li>The <b>Logs</b> tab shows log output generated by the workflow job.</li>
-	<li>The <b>Definition</b> tab shows the Oozie workflow definition, as it appears in the <tt>workflow.xml</tt> file (also linked under the application path properties in the <b>Details</b> tab and the <b>Configuration</b> tab).</li>
-</ul>
+          <li class="li">In the Coordinator Editor, click <strong class="ph b">Show existing</strong> in pane at the
+						left.</li>
 
 
+          <li class="li" id="topic_9_8_6__li_121"><a name="topic_9_8_6__li_121"><!-- --></a>To edit a dataset, click the dataset name in the Existing
+						datasets table. Proceed with <a class="xref" href="#topic_9_8_7">Editing
+							a Dataset</a>.</li>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-Coordinators"></a>Coordinators</h2>
 
-<p>Click the <b>Coordinators</b> tab to view the running and completed coordinator jobs&nbsp;for the filters you have specified.</p>
+        </ol>
 
-<p>For the selected job, the following information is available.</p>
-<ul>
-	<li>The <b>Calendar</b> tab shows the timestamp of the job. Click the timestamp to open the workflow DAG.&nbsp;</li>
-	<li>The&nbsp;<b>Actions</b>&nbsp;tab shows you details about the actions that make up the coordinator.
-	<ul>
-		<li>Click the&nbsp;<b>Id</b>&nbsp;link to see additional details about the action.</li>
-		<li>Click the&nbsp;<b>External Id</b>&nbsp;link to view the job in the Job Browser.</li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-	<li>The&nbsp;<b>Configuration</b>&nbsp;tab shows selected job configuration settings.</li>
-	<li>The&nbsp;<b>Logs</b>&nbsp;tab shows log output generated by the coordinator.</li>
-	<li>The&nbsp;<b>Definition</b>&nbsp;tab shows the Oozie coordinator&nbsp;definition, as it appears in the&nbsp;<tt>coordinator.xml</tt>&nbsp;file (also linked under&nbsp;the oozie.coord.application.path property in the &nbsp;<b>Configuration</b>&nbsp;tab).</li>
-</ul>
 
+      </div>
 
-<h1><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-WorkflowManager"></a>Workflow Manager</h1>
 
-<p>In Workflow Manager you create Oozie workflows and submit them for execution.</p>
+    </div>
 
-<p>Click the <b>Workflows</b> tab to open the Workflow Manager.</p>
 
-<p>Each row shows a workflow: its name, description, timestamp of its last modification. It also shows:</p>
-<ul>
-	<li><b>Steps</b>: the number of steps in the workflow execution path. This is the number of execution steps between the start and end of the workflow. This will not necessarily be the same as the number of actions in the workflow, if there are control flow nodes in the control path.</li>
-	<li><b>Status</b>: who can run the workflow.&nbsp;<b>shared</b>&nbsp;means users other than the owner can access the workflow.&nbsp;<b>personal</b>&nbsp;means only the owner can modify or submit the workflow. The default is personal.</li>
-	<li><b>Owner</b>: the user that created the workflow.</li>
-</ul>
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_8_7"><a name="topic_9_8_7"><!-- --></a>
 
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Editing a Dataset</h3>
 
-<p>In Workflow Editor you edit workflows that include MapReduce, Streaming, Java, Pig, Hive, Sqoop, Shell, Ssh, DistCp, Fs, Email, Sub-workflow, and Generic actions. You can configure these actions in the Workflow Editor, or you can import job designs from Job Designer to be used as actions in your workflow. For information about defining workflows, see the <a href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/oozie/WorkflowFunctionalSpec.html">Workflow Specification</a>.</p>
+      <div class="body conbody">
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-InstallingtheSampleWorkflows"></a>Installing the Sample Workflows</h2>
+        <ol class="ol">
 
-<ol>
-	<li>Click the <b>Setup Examples</b> button at the top right.</li>
-</ol>
+          <li class="li">Type a name for the dataset.</li>
 
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-OpeningaWorkflow"></a>Opening a Workflow</h2>
+          <li class="li">In the Start and Frequency fields, specify when and how often the dataset
+						will be available.</li>
 
-<p>To open a workflow, in Workflow Manager, click the workflow. Proceed with&nbsp;<a href="#OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaWorkflow">Editing a Workflow</a>.</p>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-CreatingaWorkflow"></a>Creating a Workflow</h2>
+          <li class="li">In the URI field, specify a URI template for the location of the
+            dataset. To construct URIs and URI paths containing dates and timestamps, you can
+            specify the variables <samp class="ph codeph">${YEAR}</samp><samp class="ph codeph">,$</samp><samp class="ph codeph">{MONTH},${DAY},${HOUR},${MINUTE}</samp>. For example:<samp class="ph codeph">
+              hdfs://foo:9000/usr/app/stats/${YEAR}/${MONTH}/data</samp>.</li>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>Click the <b>Create</b>&nbsp;button at the top right.</li>
-	<li>In the Name field, type a name.</li>
-	<li>Click <b>advanced</b> to specify whether the workflow is shared, the deployment directory, or a job.xml file.</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Save</b>. The Workflow Editor opens. Proceed with&nbsp;<a href="#OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaWorkflow">Editing a Workflow</a>.</li>
-</ol>
 
+          <li class="li">In the Instance field, click a button to choose a default, single, or range
+						of data instances. For example, if frequency==DAY, a window of the last
+						rolling 5 days (not including today) would be expressed as start: -5 and
+						end: -1. Check the advanced checkbox to display a field where you can
+						specify a coordinator <a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/oozie/CoordinatorFunctionalSpec.html" target="_blank">EL function</a>.</li>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-ImportingaWorkflow"></a>Importing a Workflow</h2>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>Click the <b>Import</b>&nbsp;button at the top right.</li>
-	<li>In the Name field, type a name.</li>
-	<li>In the <b>Local workflow.xml file</b> field, click <b>Choose File</b> and select a workflow file.</li>
-	<li>Click <b>advanced</b> to specify whether the workflow is shared, the deployment directory, or a job.xml file.</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Save</b>. The Workflow Editor opens. Proceed with&nbsp;<a href="#OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaWorkflow">Editing a Workflow</a>.</li>
-</ol>
+          <li class="li">Specify the timezone of the start date.</li>
 
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-SubmittingaWorkflow"></a>Submitting a Workflow</h2>
+          <li class="li">In the Done flag field, specify the flag that identifies when input datasets
+						are no longer ready.</li>
 
-<p>To submit a workflow for execution, do one of the following:</p>
 
-<ul>
-	<li>In the Workflow Manager, click the radio button next to the workflow, and click the <b>Submit</b> button.</li>
-	<li>In the Workflow Editor, click the <b>Submit</b> button.</li>
-</ul>
+        </ol>
 
 
-<p>The workflow job is submitted and the Dashboard displays the workflow job.</p>
+      </div>
 
-<p>To view the output of the job, click <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/jobsub/static/help/images/23888324.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span> <b>View the logs</b>.</p>
 
-<h3><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-SuspendingaRunningJob"></a>Suspending a Running Job</h3>
+    </div>
 
-<p>In the pane on the left, click the <b>Suspend</b> button.</p>
-<ol>
-	<li>Verify that you want to suspend the job.</li>
-</ol>
 
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_9_8_8"><a name="topic_9_8_8"><!-- --></a>
 
-<h3><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-ResumingaSuspendedJob"></a>Resuming a Suspended Job</h3>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Displaying the History of a Coordinator</h3>
 
-<p>In the pane on the left, click the <b>Resume</b> button.</p>
-<ol>
-	<li>Verify that you want to resume the job.</li>
-</ol>
+      <div class="body conbody">
 
+        <ol class="ol">
+          <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Dashboard</strong> tab.</li>
 
-<h3><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-RerunningaWorkflow"></a>Rerunning a Workflow</h3>
+          <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Coordinators</strong> tab. </li>
 
-<p>In the pane on the left, click the <b>Rerun</b> button.</p>
-<ol>
-	<li>Check the checkboxes next to the actions to rerun.</li>
-	<li>Specify required variables.</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Submit</b>.</li>
-</ol>
+          <li class="li">Click a coordinator.</li>
 
+          <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Actions</strong> tab.</li>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-SchedulingaWorkflow"></a>Scheduling a Workflow</h2>
+        </ol>
 
-<p>To schedule a workflow for recurring execution, do one of the following:</p>
 
-<ul>
-	<li>In the Workflow Manager, click the radio button next to the workflow and click the <b>Schedule</b> button.</li>
-	<li>In the Workflow Editor, click the <b>Schedule</b> button.</li>
-</ul>
+      </div>
 
 
-<p>A coordinator is created and opened in the Coordinator Editor. Proceed with&nbsp;<a href="#OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaCoordinator">Editing a Coordinator</a>.</p>
+    </div>
 
-<p><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaWorkflow"></a></p>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaWorkflow"></a>Editing a Workflow</h2>
+  </div>
 
-<p>In the Workflow Editor you can easily perform operations on Oozie action and control nodes.</p>
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" id="concept_crd_ttp_wj"><a name="concept_crd_ttp_wj"><!-- --></a>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Bundle Manager</h2>
 
-<h3><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-ActionNodes"></a>Action Nodes</h3>
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <p class="p">In Bundle Manager you create Oozie bundle applications and submit them
+        for execution. </p>
 
-<p>The Workflow Editor supports dragging and dropping action nodes. As you move the action over other actions and forks, highlights indicate active areas.  If there are actions in the workflow, the active areas are the actions themselves and the areas above and below the actions. If you drop an action on an existing action, a fork and join is added to the workflow.</p>
+      <p class="p">Click the <strong class="ph b">Bundle</strong> tab to open the
+        Bundle Manager. </p>
 
-<ul>
-	<li>Add actions to the workflow by doing one of the following:
-	<ul>
-		<li>Click an action (<span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/jobsub/static/help/images/23888498.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span>) button and drop the action on the workflow. The Edit Node screen displays.
-		<ol>
-			<li>Set the action properties and click <b>Done</b>. Each action in a workflow must have a unique name.</li>
-		</ol>
-		</li>
-		<li>Click the <b>Import action</b> link to import an existing job design. The Import Action screen displays.
-		<ol>
-			<li>Click a radio button next to a job design and click <b>Import</b>. The action is added to the end of the workflow.</li>
-		</ol>
-		</li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-	<li>Clone an action by clicking the <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/jobsub/static/help/images/23888163.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span> button.
-	<ol>
-		<li>The action is opened in the Edit Node screen.</li>
-		<li>Edit the action properties and click <b>Done</b>. The action is added to the end of the workflow.</li>
-	</ol>
-	</li>
-	<li>Delete an action by clicking the <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/jobsub/static/help/images/23888458.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span> button.</li>
-	<li>Edit an action by clicking the <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/jobsub/static/help/images/23888457.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span> button.</li>
-	<li>Change the position of an action by left-clicking and dragging an action to a new location.</li>
-</ul>
+      <p class="p">Each row shows a bundle: its name, description, timestamp of its last
+        modification. It also shows: </p>
 
+      <a name="concept_crd_ttp_wj__ul_skt_5kj_2k"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="concept_crd_ttp_wj__ul_skt_5kj_2k">
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Coordinators</strong> -  the coordinators
+          that will be run by the bundle.</li>
 
-<h3><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-ControlNodes"></a>Control Nodes</h3>
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Kick off</strong> - the UTC time when the
+          coordinators referenced by the bundle will be started.  </li>
 
-<ul>
-	<li>Create a fork and join by dropping an action on top of another action.</li>
-	<li>Remove a fork and join by dragging a forked action and dropping it above the fork.</li>
-	<li>Convert a fork to a decision by clicking the <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/jobsub/static/help/images/23888456.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span> button.</li>
-	<li>To edit a decision:
-	<ol>
-		<li>Click the <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/jobsub/static/help/images/23888457.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span> button.</li>
-		<li>Fill in the predicates that determines which action to perform and select the default action from the drop-down list.</li>
-		<li>Click <b>Done</b>.</li>
-	</ol>
-	</li>
-</ul>
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Status</strong> - who can run the bundle.
+            <strong class="ph b">shared</strong> means users other than the owner can access the
+          workflow. <strong class="ph b">personal</strong> means only the owner can modify or
+          submit the workflow. The default is personal.</li>
 
+        <li class="li"><strong class="ph b">Owner</strong> - the user that created the
+          bundle.</li>
 
+      </ul>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-UploadingWorkflowFiles"></a>Uploading Workflow Files</h2>
+      <p class="p">For information about defining bundles, see the <a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/oozie/BundleFunctionalSpec.html" target="_blank"> Bundle
+          Specification</a>.</p>
 
-<p>In the Workflow Editor, click the <b>Upload</b> button.</p>
+    </div>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingWorkflowProperties"></a>Editing Workflow Properties</h2>
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_t5k_wqj_2k"><a name="concept_t5k_wqj_2k"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Opening a Bundle</h3>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the Workflow Editor, click the link under the Name or Description fields in the left pane.</li>
-	<li>To share the workflow with all users, check the <b>Is shared</b> checkbox.</li>
-	<li>To set advanced execution options, click <b>advanced</b> and edit the deployment directory, add parameters and job properties, or specify a job.xml file.</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Save</b>.</li>
-</ol>
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <p class="p">To open a bundle, in Bundle Manager, click the bundle. Proceed with
+            <a class="xref" href="#concept_ur1_gmj_2k">Editing a Bundle</a>. </p>
 
+      </div>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-DisplayingtheHistoryofaWorkflow"></a>Displaying the History of a Workflow</h2>
+    </div>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>Do one of the following:
-	<ul>
-		<li>In the Workflow Editor, click <b>Show history</b> in the pane at the left. Click a job.</li>
-		<li>In the Oozie Dashboard/Editor, click the <b>History</b> tab. Click a submission Id.</li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-</ol>
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_rvt_gmj_2k"><a name="concept_rvt_gmj_2k"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Creating a Bundle</h3>
 
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <a name="concept_rvt_gmj_2k__ol_wgk_jmj_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_rvt_gmj_2k__ol_wgk_jmj_2k">
+          <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Create</strong> button at the
+            top right.</li>
 
-<h1><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-CoordinatorManager"></a>Coordinator Manager</h1>
+          <li class="li">In the Name field, type a name.</li>
 
-<p>In Coordinator Manager you create Oozie coordinator applications and submit them for execution. </p>
+          <li class="li">In the Kick off time field, choose a kick off time.  </li>
 
-<p>Click the <b>Coordinators</b> tab to open the Coordinator Manager.</p>
+          <li class="li">Check the <span class="ph uicontrol">Is
+              shared</span> checkbox to allow all users to access the workflow.</li>
 
-<p>Each row shows a coordinator: its name, description, timestamp of its last modification. It also shows:</p>
-<ul>
-	<li><b>Workflow</b>: the workflow that will be run by the coordinator.</li>
-	<li><b>Frequency</b>: how often the workflow referenced by the coordinator will be run.</li>
-	<li><b>Status</b>: who can run the coordinator. <b>shared</b> means users other than the owner can access the workflow. <b>personal</b> means only the owner can modify or submit the workflow. The default is personal.</li>
-	<li><b>Owner</b>: the user that created the workflow.</li>
-</ul>
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Save</strong>. The Bundle Editor
+            opens. Proceed with <a class="xref" href="#concept_ur1_gmj_2k">Editing a Bundle</a>.</li>
 
+        </ol>
 
-<p>In Coordinator Editor, you edit coordinators and the datasets required by the coordinators. For information about defining coordinators and datasets, see the <a href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/oozie/CoordinatorFunctionalSpec.html">Coordinator Specification</a>.</p>
+      </div>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-OpeningaCoordinator"></a>Opening a Coordinator</h2>
+    </div>
 
-<p>To open a coordinator, in Coordinator Manager, click the coordinator. Proceed with <a href="#OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaCoordinator">Editing a Coordinator</a>.</p>
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_fcd_1rj_2k"><a name="concept_fcd_1rj_2k"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Submitting a Bundle</h3>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-CreatingaCoordinator"></a>Creating a Coordinator</h2>
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <p class="p">To submit a bundle for execution, check the checkbox next to the
+          bundle and click the <strong class="ph b">Submit</strong> button. </p>
 
-<p>To create a coordinator, in Coordinator Manager:</p>
-<ol>
-	<li>Click the *Create button at the top right. The Coordinator wizard opens. Proceed with <a href="#OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaCoordinator">Editing a Coordinator</a>.</li>
-</ol>
+      </div>
 
+    </div>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-SubmittingaCoordinator"></a>Submitting a Coordinator</h2>
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_ur1_gmj_2k"><a name="concept_ur1_gmj_2k"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Editing a Bundle</h3>
 
-<p>To submit a coordinator for execution, click the radio button next to the coordinator and click the <b>Submit</b> button.</p>
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <p class="p">In the Bundle Editor, you specify properties by stepping through
+          screens in a wizard. <span class="ph">You can also advance to particular steps and revisit
+            steps by clicking the Step "tabs" above the screens. The following instructions walk you
+            through the wizard. </span>
+        </p>
 
-<p><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaCoordinator"></a></p>
+        <a name="concept_ur1_gmj_2k__ol_evj_rmj_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_ur1_gmj_2k__ol_evj_rmj_2k">
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add</strong> to select a
+            coordinator that the bundle will kick off.</li>
 
+          <li class="li">Choose the kick off time.  The time must be expressed as a UTC
+            time. For example, to run at 10 pm PST, specify a start time of 6 am UTC of the
+            following day (+8 hours).</li>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaCoordinator"></a>Editing a Coordinator</h2>
+          <li class="li">To share the bundle with all users, check the <strong class="ph b">Is shared</strong> checkbox.</li>
 
-<p>In the Coordinator Editor you specify coordinator properties and the datasets on which the workflow scheduled by the coordinator will operate by stepping through screens in a wizard. You can also advance to particular steps and revisit steps by clicking the Step "tabs" above the screens. The following instructions walk you through the coordinator wizard. </p>
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Next</strong> to specify advanced
+            settings or click <strong class="ph b">Save bundle</strong>.</li>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>Type a name, select the workflow, check the Is shared checkbox to share the job, and click <b>Next</b>. If the Coordinator Editor was opened after scheduling a workflow, the workflow will be set.</li>
-	<li>Select how many times the communicator will run for each specified unit, the start and end times of the coordinator, the timezone of the start and end times, and click <b>Next</b>. The start and end times must be expressed as UTC times. For example, to run at 10 pm PST, specify a start time of 6 am UTC of the following day (+8 hours) and set the Timezone field to America/Los_Angeles.</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Add</b> to select an input dataset and click <b>Next</b>. If no datasets exist, follow the procedure in <a href="#OozieEditorandDashboard-CreatingaDataset">Creating a Dataset</a>.</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Add</b> to select an output dataset.  Click <b>Save coordinator</b> or click <b>Next</b> to specify advanced settings.</li>
-	<li>To share the coordinator with all users, check the <b>Is shared</b> checkbox.</li>
-	<li>Fill in parameters to pass to Oozie, properties that determine how long a coordinator will wait before timing out, how many coordinators can run and wait concurrently, and the coordinator execution policy.</li>
-	<li>Click <b>Save coordinator</b>.</li>
-</ol>
+          <li class="li">Fill in parameters to pass to Oozie.</li>
 
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Save bundle</strong>.</li>
 
+        </ol>
 
-<p><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-CreatingaDataset"></a></p>
+      </div>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-CreatingaDataset"></a>Creating a Dataset</h2>
+    </div>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the Coordinator Editor, do one of the following:
-	<ul>
-		<li>Click <b>here</b> in the Inputs or Outputs pane at the top of the editor.</li>
-		<li>In the pane at the left, click the <b>Create new</b> link. Proceed with <a href="#OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaDataset">Editing a Dataset</a>.</li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-</ol>
+  </div>
 
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" id="concept_alh_gqj_2k"><a name="concept_alh_gqj_2k"><!-- --></a>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Displaying the History of a Bundle</h2>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-DisplayingDatasets"></a>Displaying Datasets</h2>
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <a name="concept_alh_gqj_2k__ol_rdg_hqj_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_alh_gqj_2k__ol_rdg_hqj_2k">
+        <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Dashboard</strong> tab.</li>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>In the Coordinator Editor, click <b>Show existing</b> in pane at the left.</li>
-	<li>To edit a dataset, click the dataset name in the Existing datasets table. Proceed with <a href="#OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaDataset">Editing a Dataset</a>.</li>
-</ol>
+        <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Bundles</strong> tab. </li>
 
+        <li class="li">Click a bundle.</li>
 
-<p><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaDataset"></a></p>
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-EditingaDataset"></a>Editing a Dataset</h2>
+        <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Actions</strong> tab.</li>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>Type a name for the dataset.</li>
-	<li>In the Start and Frequency fields, specify when and how often the dataset will be available.</li>
-	<li>In the URI field, specify a URI template for the location of the dataset. To construct URIs and URI paths containing dates and timestamps, you can specify the variables <tt>${YEAR},${MONTH},${DAY},${HOUR},${MINUTE</tt><tt>}</tt>. For example: <tt>hdfs://foo:9000/usr/app/stats/${YEAR}/${MONTH}/data</tt>.</li>
-	<li>In the Instance field, click a button to choose a default, single, or range of data instances. For example, if frequency==DAY, a window of the last rolling 5 days (not including today) would be expressed as start: -5 and end: -1. Check the advanced checkbox to display a field where you can specify a coordinator <a href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/oozie/CoordinatorFunctionalSpec.html#a6.6._Parameterization_of_Dataset_Instances_in_Input_and_Output_Events">EL function</a>.</li>
-	<li>Specify the timezone of the start date.</li>
-	<li>In the Done flag field, specify the flag that identifies when input datasets are no longer ready.</li>
-</ol>
+      </ol>
 
+    </div>
 
-<h2><a name="OozieEditorandDashboard-DisplayingtheHistoryofaCoordinator"></a>Displaying the History of a Coordinator</h2>
+  </div>
 
-<ol>
-	<li>Do one of the following:
-	<ul>
-		<li>In the Coordinator Editor, click <b>Show history</b> in the pane at the left.  Click a job.</li>
-		<li>In the Oozie Dashboard/Editor, click the <b>History</b> tab. Click a coordinator.</li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-</ol>
 
 
-				    					    <br/>
-                        </td>
-		    </tr>
-	    </table>
-	
-    </body>
-</html>
+</body>
+</html>

+ 139 - 3
apps/pig/static/help/index.html

@@ -1,3 +1,139 @@
-<html>
-<h1><a name="AboutHue-AboutHue"></a>About pig</h1>
-</html>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE html
+  PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html lang="en-us" xml:lang="en-us">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"/>
+<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="commonltr.css"/>
+<title>Pig Editor</title>
+</head>
+<body id="xd_583c10bfdbd326ba-3ca24a24-13d80143249--7f9c"><a name="xd_583c10bfdbd326ba-3ca24a24-13d80143249--7f9c"><!-- --></a>
+
+
+  <h1 class="title topictitle1">Pig Editor</h1>
+
+
+  <div class="body conbody">
+    <p class="p">The Pig Editor application allows you to define Pig scripts, run scripts,
+      and view the status of jobs. For information about Pig, see <a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/pig/" target="_blank">Pig Documentation</a>. </p>
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" id="concept_u25_g2v_yj"><a name="concept_u25_g2v_yj"><!-- --></a>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Pig Editor Installation and Configuration </h2>
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <p class="p">Pig Editor is one of the applications installed as part of Hue. <span class="ph">For information about installing and configuring Hue,
+        see Hue Installation in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html</a>.</span> Pig Editor assumes an existing Pig installation. The Hue installation instructions
+        include the configuration necessary for Pig Editor to access Pig.</p>
+
+    </div>
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" id="concept_e2q_xn5_wj"><a name="concept_e2q_xn5_wj"><!-- --></a>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Starting Pig Editor</h2>
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <div class="p">Click the <strong class="ph b">Pig Editor</strong> icon (<a name="concept_e2q_xn5_wj__image_fgk_4n5_wj"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="concept_e2q_xn5_wj__image_fgk_4n5_wj" src="/static/art/help/icon_pig_24.png"/>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue
+        browser page. The Pig Editor opens with three tabs:<a name="concept_e2q_xn5_wj__ul_itr_clx_2k"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="concept_e2q_xn5_wj__ul_itr_clx_2k">
+          <li class="li">Editor - editor where you can create, edit, run, save, copy, and
+            delete scripts and edit script properties.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Scripts - script manager where you can create, open, run, copy,
+            and delete scripts. </li>
+
+          <li class="li">Dashboard - dashboard where you can view running and completed
+            scripts and view the log of a job. </li>
+
+        </ul>
+</div>
+
+    </div>
+
+  </div>
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" id="concept_lng_kjt_yj"><a name="concept_lng_kjt_yj"><!-- --></a>
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Installing the Sample Pig Scripts </h2>
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> You must be a superuser to perform this task.</div>
+
+      <a name="concept_lng_kjt_yj__ol_zys_pjt_yj"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_lng_kjt_yj__ol_zys_pjt_yj">
+        <li class="li">Click <a name="concept_lng_kjt_yj__d45e102"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="concept_lng_kjt_yj__d45e102" src="/static/art/help/quick_start.png"/>. The Quick Start Wizard opens.</li>
+<li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Step 2:
+            Examples</strong>.</li>
+
+        <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Pig Editor</strong>.</li>
+
+      </ol>
+
+    </div>
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" id="concept_b5z_23x_2k"><a name="concept_b5z_23x_2k"><!-- --></a>
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Scripts</h3>
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+        <div class="section" id="concept_b5z_23x_2k__section_s35_5lx_2k"><a name="concept_b5z_23x_2k__section_s35_5lx_2k"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Creating a Script</h4>
+          
+          <a name="concept_b5z_23x_2k__ol_mwq_z2y_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_b5z_23x_2k__ol_mwq_z2y_2k">
+            <li class="li">In either the Editor or Scripts screen, click <span class="ph uicontrol">New
+                script</span>. Edit the script as desired.</li>
+
+            <li class="li">Click <span class="ph uicontrol">Edit
+              Properties</span>. In the Script name field, type a name for the script.</li>
+
+            <li class="li">Click <span class="ph uicontrol">Save</span>.</li>
+
+          </ol>
+
+        </div>
+
+        <div class="section" id="concept_b5z_23x_2k__section_tvv_5lx_2k"><a name="concept_b5z_23x_2k__section_tvv_5lx_2k"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Opening a Script</h4>
+          
+          <a name="concept_b5z_23x_2k__ol_nvn_2fy_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_b5z_23x_2k__ol_nvn_2fy_2k">
+            <li class="li">Click the <span class="ph uicontrol">Scripts</span> tab.</li>
+
+            <li class="li">In the list of scripts, click a script.</li>
+
+          </ol>
+
+        </div>
+
+        <div class="section" id="concept_b5z_23x_2k__section_gjr_rfy_2k"><a name="concept_b5z_23x_2k__section_gjr_rfy_2k"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Running a Script</h4>
+          
+          <a name="concept_b5z_23x_2k__ol_r2q_sfy_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_b5z_23x_2k__ol_r2q_sfy_2k">
+            <li class="li">Do one of the following:<a name="concept_b5z_23x_2k__ul_gj2_5fy_2k"><!-- --></a><ul class="ul" id="concept_b5z_23x_2k__ul_gj2_5fy_2k">
+                <li class="li">In the Editor screen, click the <span class="ph uicontrol">Run</span> button.</li>
+
+                <li class="li">In the Scripts screen,  check the checkbox next to a script and click the
+                    <span class="ph uicontrol">Run</span> button.</li>
+
+              </ul>
+</li>
+
+          </ol>
+
+        </div>
+
+        <div class="section" id="concept_b5z_23x_2k__section_kf2_zfy_2k"><a name="concept_b5z_23x_2k__section_kf2_zfy_2k"><!-- --></a><h4 class="title sectiontitle">Viewing the Result of Running a Script</h4>
+          
+          <a name="concept_b5z_23x_2k__ol_jvm_2gy_2k"><!-- --></a><ol class="ol" id="concept_b5z_23x_2k__ol_jvm_2gy_2k">
+            <li class="li">Click the <span class="ph uicontrol">Dashboard</span> tab.</li>
+
+            <li class="li">Click a job.</li>
+
+          </ol>
+
+        </div>
+
+      </div>
+
+    </div>
+
+  </div>
+
+
+</body>
+</html>

+ 151 - 93
apps/shell/src/shell/static/help/index.html

@@ -1,93 +1,151 @@
-<h1><a name="HueShell-IntroducingHueShell"></a>Introducing Hue Shell</h1>
-
-<p>The Hue Shell application provides access to the Pig, HBase, and Sqoop 2 command-line shells. The Shell application is designed to have the same look and feel as a Unix terminal. In addition to the shells configured by default, it is possible to include almost any process that exposes a command-line interface as an option in this Hue application.</p>
-
-
-
-<h2><a name="HueShell-Contents"></a>Contents</h2>
-
-<style type='text/css'>/*<![CDATA[*/
-div.rbtoc1360721308484 {margin-left: 1.5em;padding: 0px;}
-div.rbtoc1360721308484 ul {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 20px;}
-div.rbtoc1360721308484 li {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 0px;}
-
-/*]]>*/</style><div class='rbtoc1360721308484'>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#HueShell-IntroducingHueShell'>Introducing Hue Shell</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#HueShell-HueShellInstallationandConfiguration'>Hue Shell Installation and Configuration</a></li>
-<ul>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#HueShell-UnixUserAccounts'>Unix User Accounts</a></li>
-</ul>
-</ul>
-    <li><a href='#HueShell-StartingHueShell'>Starting Hue Shell</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#HueShell-ViewingDocumentationfortheShells'>Viewing Documentation for the Shells</a></li>
-</ul></div>
-
-<h1><a name="HueShell-HueShellInstallationandConfiguration"></a>Hue Shell Installation and Configuration</h1>
-
-<p>Hue Shell is one of the applications that is installed as part of Hue. For information about installing and configuring Hue, see <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/CDH4DOC/Hue+Installation">Hue Installation</a>.</p>
-
-<h3><a name="HueShell-UnixUserAccounts"></a>Unix User Accounts</h3>
-
-<p>To properly isolate subprocesses so as to guarantee security, each Hue user who is using the Shell subprocess must have a Unix user account. The link between Hue users and Unix user accounts is the username, and so every Hue user who wants to use the Shell application must have a Unix user account with the same name on the sytem that runs the Hue Server.  See the section on Unix user accounts in the Hue Shell configuration section of the <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/CDH4DOC/Hue+Installation#HueInstallation-UnixUserAccounts">Hue Installation Guide</a> for instructions.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-
-<h1><a name="HueShell-StartingHueShell"></a>Starting Hue Shell</h1>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>To start the Hue Shell application, click the <b>Shell</b> icon (<span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/shell/static/help/images/23888153.png" width="30" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue web page. (To start a second instance of the Shell application, right-click the link and select <b>Open link in new tab</b>.)
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The <b>Shell</b> window opens in the Hue web page.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click any of the tabs at the top of the Shell window to open a subprocess shell of that type.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<div class='panelMacro'><table class='noteMacro'><colgroup><col width='24'><col></colgroup><tr><td valign='top'><img src="/static/art/help/warning.gif" width="16" height="16" align="absmiddle" alt="" border="0"></td><td><b>Note:</b> If a button is disabled, the program is not on the system path. Ask your Hue administrator to fix this problem.</td></tr></table></div></li>
-	<li>After opening a subprocess, click anywhere in the body of the Shell application window to focus the command line. (Tab-completion is not supported.)
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To end a process, type <tt>exit</tt> or <tt>quit</tt> depending on the type of subprocess you have opened.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<div class='panelMacro'><table class='noteMacro'><colgroup><col width='24'><col></colgroup><tr><td valign='top'><img src="/static/art/help/warning.gif" width="16" height="16" align="absmiddle" alt="" border="0"></td><td><b>Note:</b> If you close your browser, the underlying shell process remains running for the amount of time specified by your Hue administrator. After this time the process is killed.</td></tr></table></div>
-<p><br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p></li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<h1><a name="HueShell-ViewingDocumentationfortheShells"></a>Viewing Documentation for the Shells</h1>
-
-<p>For information about using each of the default shells, see the documentation on the following sites:</p>
-
-<style type="text/css">
-td.confluenceTd {
-border: #dddddd solid 1px;
-height: 36px;
-padding: 5px 10px;
-vertical-align: top;
-}
-th.confluenceTh {
-border: #dddddd solid 1px;
-height: 40px;
-padding: 5px 10px;
-vertical-align: center;
-}
-</style>
-
-
-<ul>
-	<li><a href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/pig/">Pig</a></li>
-	<li><a href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/hbase/">HBase</a></li>
-	<li><a href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/sqoop2/">Sqoop 2</a></li>
-</ul>
-
-
-				    					    <br/>
-                        </td>
-		    </tr>
-	    </table>
-	    
-    </body>
-</html>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE html
+  PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html lang="en-us" xml:lang="en-us">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"/>
+<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="commonltr.css"/>
+<title>Hue Shell</title>
+</head>
+<body id="topic_10"><a name="topic_10"><!-- --></a>
+
+
+
+  <h1 class="title topictitle1">Hue Shell</h1>
+
+
+  <div class="body conbody">
+
+    <p class="p">
+      The Hue Shell application provides access to the Pig, HBase, and Sqoop 2 command-line shells. The Shell
+      application is designed to have the same look and feel as a Unix terminal. In addition to the shells configured by
+      default, it is possible to include almost any process that exposes a command-line interface as an option in this
+      Hue application.
+    </p>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_10_1"><a name="topic_10_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Hue Shell Installation and Configuration</h2>
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p"> Hue Shell is one of the applications installed as part of Hue. <span class="ph">For information about installing and configuring Hue,
+        see Hue Installation in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html</a>.</span></p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_10_1_1"><a name="topic_10_1_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">  Unix User Accounts
+     </h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p"> To properly isolate subprocesses so as to guarantee security, each
+          Hue user who is using the Shell subprocess must have a Unix user account. The link between
+          Hue users and Unix user accounts is the username, and so every Hue user who wants to use
+          the Shell application must have a Unix user account with the same name on the system that
+          runs the Hue Server. See Unix User Accounts in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html</a> for instructions. </p>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_10_2"><a name="topic_10_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Starting Hue Shell</h2>
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <ol class="ol">
+
+        <li class="li">Click the <strong class="ph b">Shell</strong> icon (<img class="image" src="/static/art/help/icon_shell_24.png"/>)
+          in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue web page. (To start a second instance of the
+          Shell application, right-click the link and select <strong class="ph b">Open link
+            in new tab</strong>.) The <strong class="ph b">Shell</strong> window opens in the Hue web
+          page.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">Click any of the tabs at the top of the Shell window to open a
+          subprocess shell of that type. <div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> If a button is disabled, the program is not on the
+            system path. Ask your Hue administrator to fix this problem.</div>
+
+        </li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">After opening a subprocess, click anywhere in the body of the Shell application
+					window to focus the command line. (Tab-completion is not supported.)</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">To end a process, type <samp class="ph codeph">exit</samp> or <samp class="ph codeph">quit</samp> depending
+					on the type of subprocess you have opened.
+
+                <div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> 
+                  If you close your browser, the underlying shell process remains running for the amount of
+                  time specified by your Hue administrator. After this time the process is killed.
+                </div>
+
+        </li>
+
+
+      </ol>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_10_3"><a name="topic_10_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Viewing Documentation for the Shells</h2>
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">
+        For information about using each of the default shells, see the documentation on the following sites:
+      </p>
+
+
+      <ul class="ul">
+
+        <li class="li"><a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/pig/" target="_blank">Pig</a>
+        </li>
+
+
+        <li class="li"><a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/hbase/" target="_blank">HBase</a>
+        </li>
+
+
+        <li class="li"><a class="xref" href="http://archive.cloudera.com/cdh4/cdh/4/sqoop2/" target="_blank">Sqoop 2</a>
+        </li>
+
+
+      </ul>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+
+</body>
+</html>

+ 754 - 327
apps/useradmin/static/help/index.html

@@ -1,338 +1,765 @@
-<h1><a name="UserAdmin-IntroducingUserAdmin"></a>Introducing User Admin</h1>
-
-<p>The User Admin application lets an administrator add, delete, and manage Hue user accounts and groups, and configure group permissions. The permissions allow users, based on their group membership, to launch Hue applications and use application features.  You can add users and groups individually, or import them from an LDAP directory.</p>
-
-
-
-<h2><a name="UserAdmin-Contents"></a>Contents</h2>
-
-<style type='text/css'>/*<![CDATA[*/
-div.rbtoc1355772985424 {margin-left: 1.5em;padding: 0px;}
-div.rbtoc1355772985424 ul {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 20px;}
-div.rbtoc1355772985424 li {margin-left: 0px;padding-left: 0px;}
-
-/*]]>*/</style><div class='rbtoc1355772985424'>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-IntroducingUserAdmin'>Introducing User Admin</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-StartingUserAdmin'>Starting User Admin</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-WorkingwithUserAccounts'>Working with User Accounts</a></li>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-AddingaUserAccount'>Adding a User Account</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-DeletingaUserAccount'>Deleting a User Account</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-EditingaUserAccount'>Editing a User Account</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-ImportingUsersfromanLDAPDirectory'>Importing Users from an LDAP Directory</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-SyncingUsersandGroupswithanLDAPdirectory'>Syncing Users and Groups with an LDAP directory</a></li>
-</ul>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-WorkingwithGroups'>Working with Groups</a></li>
-<ul>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-AddingaGroup'>Adding a Group</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-AddingUserstoaGroup'>Adding Users to a Group</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-DeletingaGroup'>Deleting a Group</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-EditingaGroup'>Editing a Group</a></li>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-ImportingGroupsfromanLDAPDirectory'>Importing Groups from an LDAP Directory</a></li>
-</ul>
-    <li><a href='#UserAdmin-ManagingApplicationPermissions'>Managing Application Permissions</a></li>
-</ul></div>
-<p><br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-
-<h1><a name="UserAdmin-StartingUserAdmin"></a>Starting User Admin</h1>
-
-<p><b>To start User Admin:</b></p>
-
-<ul>
-	<li>Click the <b>User Admin</b> icon ( <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/useradmin/static/help/images/23888159.png" width="30" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span> ) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue browser page.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-</ul>
-
-
-<h1><a name="UserAdmin-WorkingwithUserAccounts"></a>Working with User Accounts</h1>
-
-<p>The Hue User Admin application provides two levels of user privileges: superusers and users.</p>
-<ul>
-	<li>Superusers &#8212; The first user who logs into Hue after its initial installation becomes the first superuser. Superusers have permissions to perform administrative functions:
-	<ul>
-		<li>add and delete users</li>
-		<li>add and delete groups</li>
-		<li>assign permissions to groups</li>
-		<li>change a user into a superuser</li>
-		<li>import users and groups from an LDAP server</li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-	<li>Users &#8212; can change their name, e-mail address, and password and log in to Hue and run Hue applications, subject to the permissions provided by the Hue groups to which they belong.</li>
-</ul>
-
-
-<h2><a name="UserAdmin-AddingaUserAccount"></a>Adding a User Account</h2>
-
-<p><b>To add a user account:</b>
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>User Admin</b> page, click <b>Add User</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>In the <b>Add User</b> dialog box, add information about the user.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-The following table describes the options in the <b>Add User</b> dialog box.
-
-<style type="text/css">
-td.confluenceTd {
-border: #dddddd solid 1px;
-height: 36px;
-padding: 5px 10px;
-vertical-align: top;
-}
-th.confluenceTh {
-border: #dddddd solid 1px;
-height: 40px;
-padding: 5px 10px;
-vertical-align: center;
-}
-</style>
-
-<div class='table-wrap'>
-<table class='confluenceTable'><tbody>
-<tr>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> <b>User Account Option</b> </th>
-<th class='confluenceTh'> <b>Description</b> </th>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Username</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> A user name that contains only letters, numbers, and underscores; blank spaces are not allowed and the name cannot begin with a number. The user name is used to log into Hue and in file permissions and job submissions. This is a required field. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Password</b> and <b>Password confirmation</b></td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> A password for the user. This is a required field. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>First name</b> and <b>Last name</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> The user's first and last name. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>E-mail address</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> The user's e-mail address. The e-mail address is used by the Job Designer and Beeswax applications to send users an e-mail message after certain actions have occurred. The Job Designer sends an e-mail message after a user's job has completed. Beeswax sends a message after a query has completed. If an e-mail address is not specified, the application will not attempt to email the user. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Groups</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> The groups to which the user belongs. By default, a user is assigned to the <b>default</b> group, which allows access to all applications. See <a href="#UserAdmin-AssigningPermissions">Assigning Permissions</a>.</td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Active</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Indicate that the user account is enabled and the user is allowed to log in. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Create home directory</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Create a directory named /user/&lt;Username&gt; in HDFS. For non-superusers, the user and group of the directory are &lt;Username&gt;. For superusers, the user and group are &lt;Username&gt; and supergroup. </td>
-</tr>
-<tr>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> <b>Superuser&nbsp;status</b> </td>
-<td class='confluenceTd'> Assign superuser privileges to the user. </td>
-</tr>
-</tbody></table>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE html
+  PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html lang="en-us" xml:lang="en-us">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"/>
+<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="commonltr.css"/>
+<title>User Admin</title>
+</head>
+<body id="topic_11"><a name="topic_11"><!-- --></a>
+
+
+
+  <h1 class="title topictitle1">User Admin </h1>
+
+
+  <div class="body conbody">
+
+    <p class="p">The User Admin application lets a superuser add, delete, and manage Hue
+      users and groups, and configure group permissions. Superusers can add users and groups
+      individually, or import them from an LDAP directory. Group permissions define the Hue
+      applications visible to group members when they log into Hue and the application features
+      available to them.  </p>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_1"><a name="topic_11_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Starting User Admin</h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">Click the <strong class="ph b">User Admin</strong> icon (<a name="topic_11_1__image_exr_mp5_wj"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_11_1__image_exr_mp5_wj" src="/static/art/help/icon_useradmin_24.png"/>) in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue browser page. The Hue
+        Users page opens. </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_2"><a name="topic_11_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Users</h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">The User Admin application provides two levels of user privileges:
+        superusers and users. </p>
+
+
+      <ul class="ul">
+
+        <li class="li">Superusers — The first user who logs into Hue after its initial
+          installation becomes the first superuser. Superusers have permissions to perform
+          administrative functions:<ul class="ul">
+            <li class="li">Add and delete users</li>
+
+            <li class="li">Add and delete groups</li>
+
+            <li class="li">Assign permissions to groups</li>
+
+            <li class="li">Change a user into a superuser</li>
+
+            <li class="li">Import users and groups from an LDAP server</li>
+
+          </ul>
+</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">Users — can change their name, e-mail address, and password and log in to Hue
+					and run Hue applications, subject to the permissions provided by the Hue groups
+					to which they belong.</li>
+
+
+      </ul>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_2_1"><a name="topic_11_2_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Adding a User</h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">User Admin</strong> page, click <strong class="ph b">Add User</strong>. </li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Credentials</strong> screen, add
+            required information about the user. Once you provide the required information you can
+            click the wizard step tabs to set other information.
+<div class="tablenoborder"><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+                
+                
+                <tbody class="tbody">
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Username</strong>
+                      </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">A user name that contains only letters, numbers, and
+                        underscores; blank spaces are not allowed and the name cannot begin with a
+                        number. The user name is used to log into Hue and in file permissions and
+                        job submissions. This is a required field. </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Password</strong> and <strong class="ph b">Password confirmation</strong>
+                      </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">A password for the user. This is a required field. </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Create home directory</strong>
+                      </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p" id="topic_11_2_1__p_rll_r1q_2k"><a name="topic_11_2_1__p_rll_r1q_2k"><!-- --></a>Indicate whether <span class="ph" id="topic_11_2_1__homeDir"><a name="topic_11_2_1__homeDir"><!-- --></a>to
+                          create a directory named
+                            <span class="ph filepath">/user/</span><var class="keyword varname">username</var> in HDFS. For
+                          non-superusers, the user and group of the directory are
+                            <var class="keyword varname">username</var>. For superusers, the user and group are
+                            <var class="keyword varname">username</var> and supergroup.</span>
+                      </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                </tbody>
+
+              </table>
+</div>
+</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add User</strong> to save the
+            information you specified and close the <strong class="ph b">Add User</strong>
+            wizard or click <strong class="ph b">Next</strong>.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Names and Groups</strong> screen, add optional
+            information. 
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="topic_11_2_1__table_slr_xzp_2k"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="topic_11_2_1__table_slr_xzp_2k" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+                
+                
+                <tbody class="tbody">
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">First name</strong> and <strong class="ph b">Last name</strong>
+                      </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">The user's first and last name. </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">E-mail address</strong>
+                      </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">The user's e-mail address. The e-mail address is used by
+                        the Job Designer and Beeswax applications to send users an e-mail message
+                        after certain actions have occurred. The Job Designer sends an e-mail
+                        message after a job has completed. Beeswax sends a message after a query has
+                        completed. If an e-mail address is not specified, the application will not
+                        attempt to email the user. </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Groups</strong>
+                      </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">The groups to which the user belongs. By default, a user
+                        is assigned to the <strong class="ph b">default</strong> group, which
+                        allows access to all applications. See <a class="xref" href="#topic_11_4">Managing
+                          Application Permissions</a>. </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                </tbody>
+
+              </table>
+</div>
+</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add User</strong> to save the
+            information you specified and close the <strong class="ph b">Add User</strong>
+            wizard or click <strong class="ph b">Next</strong>.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Advanced</strong> screen, add status information.
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="topic_11_2_1__table_wqj_d1q_2k"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="topic_11_2_1__table_wqj_d1q_2k" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+                
+                
+                <tbody class="tbody">
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Active</strong>
+                      </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">Indicate that the user is enabled and allowed to log in. </p>
+
+                      <p class="p">Default: checked.</p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Superuser status</strong>
+                      </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">Assign superuser privileges to the user. </p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                </tbody>
+
+              </table>
+</div>
+</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add User</strong> to save the
+            information you specified and close the <strong class="ph b">Add User</strong>
+            wizard.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_2_2"><a name="topic_11_2_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Deleting a User</h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the user name and click <strong class="ph b">Delete</strong>.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Yes</strong> to confirm.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_2_3"><a name="topic_11_2_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Editing a User</h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">Click the user you want to edit in the <strong class="ph b">Hue Users</strong> list.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Make the changes to the user and then click <strong class="ph b">Update user</strong>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_2_4"><a name="topic_11_2_4"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Importing Users from an LDAP Directory</h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p">Hue must be configured to use an external LDAP directory (OpenLDAP or
+          Active Directory). <span class="ph">See Hue Installation in <a class="xref" href="http://www.cloudera.com/content/cloudera-content/cloudera-docs/CDH4/latest/CDH4-Installation-Guide/CDH4-Installation-Guide.html" target="_blank">CDH4
+          Installation</a>. </span></p>
+
+
+        <div class="note note"><span class="notetitle"><img src="/static/art/help/note.jpg"/> 
+      <b>Note</b>:</span> 
+          <p class="p">  Importing users from an LDAP directory does not import any password information. You must add passwords
+            manually in order for a user to log in.
+          </p>
+
+        </div>
+
+
+        <p class="p">To add a user from an external LDAP directory:
+        </p>
+
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add/sync LDAP user</strong>. </li>
+
+          <li class="li">Specify the user properties:
+<div class="tablenoborder"><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+                
+                
+                <tbody class="tbody">
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Username</strong></p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">The user name.</p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Distinguished name</strong></p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">Indicate that Hue should use a full distinguished name for the user. This
+                        imports the user's first and last name, username, and email, but does not
+                        store the user password.</p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Create home directory</strong></p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">Indicate that Hue should create a home directory for the user in HDFS.</p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                </tbody>
+
+              </table>
+</div>
+</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add/sync user</strong>.<p class="p">If the
+              user already exists in the User Admin, the user information in User Admin is synced
+              with what is currently in the LDAP directory.</p>
+</li>
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_2_5"><a name="topic_11_2_5"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Syncing Users and Groups with an LDAP Directory</h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p">You can sync the Hue user database with the current state of the LDAP
+          directory using the <strong class="ph b">Sync LDAP users/groups</strong> function.
+          This updates the user and group information for the already imported users and groups. It
+          does not import any new users or groups. </p>
+
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Sync LDAP users/groups</strong>.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">The <strong class="ph b">Create Home Directories</strong> checkbox creates home
+            directories in HDFS for existing imported members that don't have home directories.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">Sync LDAP users and groups</strong> dialog, click <strong class="ph b">Sync</strong> to
+						perform the sync.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_3"><a name="topic_11_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Groups</h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+
+      <p class="p">Superusers can add and delete groups, configure group permissions, and
+        assign users to group memberships. </p>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_3_1"><a name="topic_11_3_1"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Adding a Group</h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <p class="p">You can add groups, and delete the groups you've added. You can also import groups from an LDAP directory.
+        </p>
+
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">User Admin</strong> window, click
+              <strong class="ph b">Groups</strong> and then click <strong class="ph b">Add Group</strong>.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Specify the group properties:
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="topic_11_3_1__table_rxy_gdh_b3"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="topic_11_3_1__table_rxy_gdh_b3" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+                
+                
+                <tbody class="tbody">
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Name</strong></p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">The name of the group. Group names can only be letters,
+                        numbers, and underscores; blank spaces are not allowed.</p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Members</strong></p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">The users in the group. Check user names or check <strong class="ph b">Select all</strong>.</p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Permissions</strong></p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">The applications the users in the group can access.
+                        Check application names or check <strong class="ph b">Select
+                          all</strong>.</p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                </tbody>
+
+              </table>
 </div>
+</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add group</strong>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_3_2"><a name="topic_11_3_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Adding Users to a Group</h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">In the <strong class="ph b">User Admin</strong> window, click <strong class="ph b">Groups</strong>.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Click the group.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">To add users to the group, check the names in the list provided or check
+							<strong class="ph b">Select All</strong>.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Update group</strong>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_3_3"><a name="topic_11_3_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Deleting a Group</h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Groups</strong>.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Check the checkbox next to the group and click <strong class="ph b">Delete</strong>.</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Yes</strong> to confirm.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+    <div class="topic concept nested2" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_3_5"><a name="topic_11_3_5"><!-- --></a>
+
+      <h3 class="title topictitle3">Importing Groups from an LDAP Directory</h3>
+
+
+      <div class="body conbody">
+
+        <ol class="ol">
+
+          <li class="li">From the <strong class="ph b">Groups</strong> tab, click <strong class="ph b">Add/sync LDAP group</strong>.</li>
+
+
+          <li class="li">Specify the group properties:
+<div class="tablenoborder"><a name="topic_11_3_5__table_rxy_gdh_b3"><!-- --></a><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="" id="topic_11_3_5__table_rxy_gdh_b3" class="table" frame="hsides" border="1" rules="all">
+                
+                
+                <tbody class="tbody">
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Name</strong></p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">The group name.</p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Distinguished name</strong></p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">Indicate that Hue should use a full distinguished name for the group.</p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Import new members</strong></p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">Indicate that Hue should import the members of the group.</p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Import new members from all subgroups
+                        </strong></p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">Indicate that Hue should import the members of the subgroups.</p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                  <tr class="row">
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="25%">
+                      <p class="p"><strong class="ph b">Create home directories</strong></p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                    <td class="entry" valign="top" width="75%">
+                      <p class="p">Indicate that Hue should create home directories in HDFS for the imported
+                        members.</p>
+
+                    </td>
+
+                  </tr>
+
+                </tbody>
+
+              </table>
+</div>
+</li>
+
+          <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Add/sync group</strong>.</li>
+
+
+        </ol>
+
+
+      </div>
+
+
+    </div>
+
+
+  </div>
+
+
+  <div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_11_4"><a name="topic_11_4"><!-- --></a>
+
+    <h2 class="title topictitle2">Permissions</h2>
+
+
+    <div class="body conbody">
+      <p class="p">Permissions for Hue applications are granted to groups, with users
+        gaining permissions based on their group membership. Group permissions define the Hue
+        applications visible to group members when they log into Hue and the application features
+        available to them. </p>
+
+
+      <ol class="ol">
+
+        <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Permissions</strong>.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">Click the application for which you want to assign permissions.</li>
+
+
+        <li class="li">Check the checkboxes next to the groups you want to have permission
+          for the application. Check <strong class="ph b">Select all</strong> to select all
+          groups.</li>
+
 
-<p><br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p></li>
-	<li>Click <b>Save</b> to save the information you specified and close the <b>Add User</b> dialog box.</li>
-</ol>
+        <li class="li">Click <strong class="ph b">Update permission</strong>. The new
+          groups will appear in the Groups column in the <strong class="ph b">Hue
+            Permissions</strong> list.</li>
 
 
-<h2><a name="UserAdmin-DeletingaUserAccount"></a>Deleting a User Account</h2>
-
-<p><b>To delete a user account:</b>
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-<ol>
-	<li>Select <b>Delete</b> in the row with the user name.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click <b>Ok</b> to confirm.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-</ol>
+      </ol>
 
 
-<h2><a name="UserAdmin-EditingaUserAccount"></a>Editing a User Account</h2>
+    </div>
 
-<p><b>To edit a user account:</b>
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-<ol>
-	<li>Double-click the user account you want to edit in the <b>Hue Users</b> list, or Select <b>Edit</b> in the row with the user name.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Make the changes to the user account and then click <b>Save</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<h2><a name="UserAdmin-ImportingUsersfromanLDAPDirectory"></a>Importing Users from an LDAP Directory</h2>
 
-<p>Hue must be configured to use an external LDAP directory (OpenLDAP or Active Directory).  See <a href="https://ccp.cloudera.com/display/CDH4DOC/Hue+Installation">Hue Installation</a>.</p>
+  </div>
 
-<div class='panelMacro'><table class='noteMacro'><colgroup><col width='24'><col></colgroup><tr><td valign='top'><img src="/static/art/help/warning.gif" width="16" height="16" align="absmiddle" alt="" border="0"></td><td><b>Note</b><br />Importing users from an LDAP directory does not import any password information.  You must add passwords manually in order for a user to log in.</td></tr></table></div>
 
-<p>To add a user from an external LDAP directory:</p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>Click <b>Add/sync LDAP user</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>In the <b>Add or Sync a LDAP user</b> dialog, type the user name in the <b>Username</b> field.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-	<ul>
-		<li>Check the <b>Distinguished Name</b> checkbox to use a full distinguished name for the user.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-This imports the user's first and last name, username, and email, but does not store the user password.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-		<li>If the user already exists in the User Admin, this will sync the user information in User Admin with what is currently in the LDAP directory.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<h2><a name="UserAdmin-SyncingUsersandGroupswithanLDAPdirectory"></a>Syncing Users and Groups with an LDAP directory</h2>
-
-<p>You can sync the Hue user database with the current state of the LDAP directory using the <b>Sync LDAP users/groups</b> function.  This will update the user/group information for the already imported users and groups. It does not import any new users or groups.</p>
-<ol>
-	<li>Click <b>Sync LDAP users/groups</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>In the <b>Sync LDAP users and groups</b> dialog, click <b>Sync</b> to perform the sync.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-</ol>
-
-
-
-<h1><a name="UserAdmin-WorkingwithGroups"></a>Working with Groups</h1>
-
-<p>Superusers can add groups, delete the groups they have created, configure group permissions, and assign users to group memberships.</p>
-
-<h2><a name="UserAdmin-AddingaGroup"></a>Adding a Group</h2>
 
-<p>You can add groups, and delete the groups you've added. You can also import groups from an LDAP directory.</p>
-
-<p><b>To add a group:</b>
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>User Admin</b> window, click <b>Groups</b> and then click <b>Add Group</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>In the <b>Add Group</b> dialog box, specify a name for the group. Group names can only be letters, numbers, and underscores; blank spaces are not allowed.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To add users to the group, check the names in the list provided or check <b>Select All</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click <b>Save</b> to save the information you specified and close the <b>Add Group</b> dialog box.</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<h2><a name="UserAdmin-AddingUserstoaGroup"></a>Adding Users to a Group</h2>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>In the <b>User Admin</b> window, click <b>Groups</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>In the <b>Groups</b> list, click the <b>Edit</b> button.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>To add users to the group, check the names in the list provided or check <b>Select All</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-</ol>
-
-
-
-<h2><a name="UserAdmin-DeletingaGroup"></a>Deleting a Group</h2>
-
-<p><b>To delete a group:</b>
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-<ol>
-	<li>Click <b>Groups</b> to view the <b>Groups</b> list.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Delete</b> button to the right of the group you want to delete.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click <b>Yes</b> to confirm.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<h2><a name="UserAdmin-EditingaGroup"></a>Editing a Group</h2>
-
-<p>You can add and remove users, and create subgroups for groups created manually in Authorization Manager.</p>
-
-<p><b>To edit a group:</b>
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></p>
-<ol>
-	<li>Click <b>Groups</b> to view the <b>Groups</b> list.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Edit</b> button to the right of the group you want to modify.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Make the changes for the group and then click <b>Save</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<h2><a name="UserAdmin-ImportingGroupsfromanLDAPDirectory"></a>Importing Groups from an LDAP Directory</h2>
-
-<p><b>To add a group from an external LDAP directory:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>From the <b>Groups</b> tab, click <b>Add/sync LDAP group</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>In the <b>Add or Sync a LDAP group</b> dialog, type the group name in the <b>Name</b> field.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-	<ul>
-		<li>Check the <b>Distinguished Name</b> checkbox to use a full distinguished name. <br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-		<li>Check <b>Import new members</b> to also import the members of the group. or the group.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	</ul>
-	</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-<h1><a name="UserAdmin-ManagingApplicationPermissions"></a>Managing Application Permissions</h1>
-
-<p>Permissions for Hue applications are granted to groups, with users gaining permissions based on their group membership. Superusers can assign or remove permissions from groups, including groups imported from LDAP.</p>
-
-<p><a name="UserAdmin-AssigningPermissions"></a></p>
-
-<p>Group permissions define the applications within Hue that group members are allowed to launch, and the features they can use.</p>
-
-<p><b>To assign or change Hue application permissions:</b></p>
-
-<ol>
-	<li>Click <b>Permissions</b>.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click the <b>Edit</b> button next to the application for which you want to assign permissions.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Select the Groups you want to have permission for the application.  You can check <b>Select All</b> to select all groups.
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" />
-<br class="atl-forced-newline" /></li>
-	<li>Click <b>Save</b>.<br/>
-The new groups will appear in the Groups column in the <b>Hue Permissions</b> list.</li>
-</ol>
-
-
-				    					    <br/>
-                        </td>
-		    </tr>
-	    </table>
-	    
-    </body>
-</html>
+</body>
+</html>

BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/action.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/applications.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/browse.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/convert.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/copy.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/databases.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/edit.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/eye.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/fbtrash.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/gear.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/huearch.jpg


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_beeswax_24.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_filebrowser_24.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_help_24.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_impala_24.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_jobbrowser_24.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_jobsub_24.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_oozie_24.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_pig_24.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_shell_24.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_table_browser_24.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/icon_useradmin_24.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/important.jpg


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/info.jpg


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/log.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/misconfiguration.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/note.jpg


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/quick_start.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/tip.jpg


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/trash.png


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/warning.jpg


BIN
desktop/core/static/art/help/workflow.jpg


+ 151 - 28
desktop/core/static/help/index.html

@@ -1,49 +1,172 @@
-<h1><a name="WelcometoHue-IntroducingHue"></a>Introducing Hue</h1>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE html
+  PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html lang="en-us" xml:lang="en-us">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"/>
+<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="commonltr.css"/>
+<title>Introducing Hue</title>
+</head>
+<body id="topic_2"><a name="topic_2"><!-- --></a>
 
-<p><a href="http://cloudera.github.com/hue/" target="_blank">Hue</a> is a browser-based environment that enables you to interact with a Hadoop cluster. Hue includes several easy to use applications that help you work with Hadoop MapReduce jobs, Hive and Impala queries, Hadoop files and user accounts. The Hue applications run in a Web browser and require no client installation. </p>
 
-<h3><a name="WelcometoHue-HueArchitecture"></a>Hue Architecture</h3>
 
-<p>Hue applications run in a Web browser and require no client installation.&nbsp;</p>
+	<h1 class="title topictitle1">Introducing Hue </h1>
 
-<p>The following figure illustrates how Hue works. Hue Server is a "container" web application that sits in between your CDH installation and the browser. It hosts all the Hue web applications and communicates with various servers that interface with CDH components.</p>
 
-<p><span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/static/help/images/23888519.jpg" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span></p>
+	<div class="body conbody">
 
-<h3><a name="WelcometoHue-StartingApplications"></a>Starting Applications</h3>
+		<p class="p"> <a href="http://gethue.com" target="_blank">Hue</a> is a set of web applications that enable you to interact with a CDH
+			cluster. Hue applications let you browse HDFS, manage a Hive metastore, and run Hive and
+			Cloudera Impala queries, HBase and Sqoop commands, Pig scripts, MapReduce jobs, and
+			Oozie workflows. </p>
 
-<p>To open a Hue application, click the appropriate tab in the navigation bar at the top of the Hue web browser window <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/static/help/images/23888202.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span>. To open a second application concurrently (or a second instance of the same application), open it in a new tab. Right-click the tab and select <b>Open link in new tab</b>.</p>
 
-<h3><a name="WelcometoHue-DisplayingHelpfortheHueApplications"></a>Displaying Help for the Hue Applications</h3>
+	</div>
 
-<p>To display the help text for a Hue application, click the <b>Help</b> ( <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/static/help/images/23888204.png" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span>) tab in the Hue navigation bar, then click the appropriate link in the Help navigation bar at the top of the Help window.</p>
 
-<h3><a name="WelcometoHue-LoggingInandOut"></a>Logging In and Out</h3>
+	<div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_2_1"><a name="topic_2_1"><!-- --></a>
 
-<p>To log out of Hue, click <b>Sign Out</b> from the pull-down list under the logged-in user name (at the right of the Hue navigation bar).</p>
+		<h2 class="title topictitle2"> Hue Architecture </h2>
 
-<h3><a name="WelcometoHue-NoticeofMisconfiguration"></a>Notice of Misconfiguration</h3>
 
-<p>If Hue detects a misconfiguration, an indicator <span class="image-wrap" style=""><img src="/static/help/images/23888160.png" height="18" style="border: 0px solid black"/></span> appears in the navigation bar at the top of the page.  Clicking this takes you to the <b>Check for misconfiguration</b> page which will indicate the potential misconfiguration(s) with hints about fixing them.</p>
+		<div class="body conbody">
 
-<h3><a name="WelcometoHue-ChangingyourPassword"></a>Changing your Password</h3>
+			<p class="p"> Hue applications run in a Web browser and require no client installation.  </p>
 
-<p>If authentication is managed by Hue (that is, authentication is not managed via some external mechanism), you can use the User Admin application to change your password. You can go directly to your own information by selecting <b>Profile</b> under the logged-in user name at the right of the Hue navigation bar.  For more information, see the User Admin Help.</p>
 
-<h3><a name="WelcometoHue-SeekingHelp%2CReportingBugs%2CandProvidingFeedback"></a>Seeking Help, Reporting Bugs, and Providing Feedback</h3>
+			<p class="p"> The following figure illustrates how Hue works. Hue Server is a
+				"container" web application that sits in between CDH and the browser. It hosts all
+				the Hue web applications and communicates with CDH components. </p>
 
-<p>The Hue team strongly values your feedback. The best way to contact us is to send email to <a href="mailto:hue-user@cloudera.org">hue-user@cloudera.org</a>.</p>
 
-<p>If you're experiencing transient errors (typically an error message saying a service is down), contact your system administrator first.</p>
+			<p class="p">
+				<br/><img class="image" src="/static/art/help/huearch.jpg"/><br/>
+			</p>
 
-<h3><a name="WelcometoHue-BrowserCompatibility"></a>Browser Compatibility</h3>
 
-<p>Hue works in Chrome, Firefox, and Safari. Internet Explorer 8  and 9 are also supported. </p>
+		</div>
 
-				    					    <br/>
-                        </td>
-		    </tr>
-	    </table>
-	    
-    </body>
-</html>
+
+	</div>
+
+
+	<div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_2_2"><a name="topic_2_2"><!-- --></a>
+
+		<h2 class="title topictitle2"> Starting Applications </h2>
+
+
+		<div class="body conbody">
+
+			<p class="p"> To open a Hue application, click the appropriate icon in the navigation
+				bar at the top of the Hue web browser window <br/><a name="topic_2_2__image_dwb_kqg_rj"><!-- --></a><img class="image" id="topic_2_2__image_dwb_kqg_rj" src="/static/art/help/applications.png"/><br/>. </p>
+
+			<p class="p">To open a second application concurrently (or a second instance of the same
+				application), right-click the icon and select <strong class="ph b">Open
+					link in new tab</strong>. </p>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+
+	</div>
+
+
+	<div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_2_3"><a name="topic_2_3"><!-- --></a>
+
+		<h2 class="title topictitle2"> Displaying Help for the Hue Applications </h2>
+
+
+		<div class="body conbody">
+
+			<p class="p"> To display the help text for a Hue application, click the <strong class="ph b">Help</strong> ( <img class="image" src="/static/art/help/icon_help_24.png"/> ) tab in the Hue navigation bar,
+				then click the appropriate link in the Help navigation bar at the top of the Help
+				window. </p>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+
+	</div>
+
+
+	<div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_2_4"><a name="topic_2_4"><!-- --></a>
+
+		<h2 class="title topictitle2"> Logging In and Out </h2>
+
+
+		<div class="body conbody">
+
+			<p class="p"> To log out of Hue, click <strong class="ph b">Sign Out</strong> from the pull-down list under the logged-in
+				user name (at the right of the Hue navigation bar). </p>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+
+	</div>
+
+
+	<div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_2_5"><a name="topic_2_5"><!-- --></a>
+
+		<h2 class="title topictitle2"> Notice of Misconfiguration </h2>
+
+
+		<div class="body conbody">
+
+			<p class="p"> If Hue detects a misconfiguration, an indicator <img class="image" src="/static/art/help/misconfiguration.png"/> appears in the navigation bar at the top of the page.
+				Clicking this indicator takes you to the <a class="xref" href="about.html#topic_3__li_h1j_fhk_zj">Check Configuration</a> screen which will indicate the
+				potential misconfiguration(s) with hints about fixing them. </p>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+
+	</div>
+
+
+	<div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_2_6"><a name="topic_2_6"><!-- --></a>
+
+		<h2 class="title topictitle2"> Changing Your Password </h2>
+
+
+		<div class="body conbody">
+
+			<p class="p">You can go directly to your own information by selecting <span class="ph menucascade"><span class="ph uicontrol"><var class="keyword varname">username</var></span> &gt; <span class="ph uicontrol">Profile</span></span> at the right of the Hue navigation bar. </p>
+
+			<p class="p">If authentication is managed by Hue (that is, authentication is
+				not managed via some external mechanism), and you are a superuser, you can use the
+					<a class="xref" href="topic_11.html#topic_11">User Admin</a> application to
+				change password and personal details. </p>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+
+	</div>
+
+
+	<div class="topic concept nested1" xml:lang="en-US" lang="en-US" id="topic_2_7"><a name="topic_2_7"><!-- --></a>
+
+		<h2 class="title topictitle2"> Seeking Help, Reporting Bugs, and Providing Feedback </h2>
+
+
+		<div class="body conbody">
+
+			<p class="p"> The Hue team strongly values your feedback. The best way to contact us is to send
+				email to <a class="xref" href="mailto:hue-user@cloudera.org" target="_blank">hue-user@cloudera.org</a>. </p>
+
+
+			<p class="p"> If you're experiencing transient errors (typically an error message saying a service
+				is down), contact your system administrator first. </p>
+
+
+		</div>
+
+
+	</div>
+
+
+
+</body>
+</html>